AV Receiver
DTR-8.8
Instruction Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-
out the permission of the copyright holder.
For U.S. models
FCC Information for User
CAUTION:
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.
The user changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild deter-
gent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thin-
ners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because
they may damage the finish or remove the panel let-
tering.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SEC-
TION CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Pressing the [Standby/On] button to select Standby
mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If you do not
intend to use the unit for an extended period,
remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-
ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-
cian for help.
5. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by the dealer from
whom you purchased this unit.
For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
6. Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you origi-
nally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks on
the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.
Modèle pour les Canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-
SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiroom Capability ........................................ 8
®
®
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna ...................... 27
Connecting a TV or Projector ............................... 32
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc,
Connecting an External Controller ....................... 44
Source Format ....................................................89
Recording from Different AV Sources .................95
Listening Mode Presets .........................................99
Connecting Integra/Onkyo
Components ....... 45
Connecting the Power Cord .................................. 45
Turning On the AV Receiver ......................... 46
Turning On and Standby ....................................... 46
First Time Setup ............................................. 47
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
®
Powered Zone 2 Setting ......................................126
Resetting the Remote Controller .........................133
Learning Commands ...........................................135
Using Macros ......................................................136
Troubleshooting ...........................................137
Specifications ...............................................141
If you can’t resolve an issue, try resetting the AV
receiver by holding down the [VCR/DVR] button
and pressing the [Standby/On] button.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features
*10
• SIRIUS Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)
Amplifier
* SiriusConnect Home tuner kit required; sold separately.
• 7-channel amplifier
*11
• HD Radio reception (N. America only)
• 140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8
ohm loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
with a maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05%
(FTC)
• 40 AM/FM/SIRIUS/XM presets (N. American model)
• 40 AM/FM presets (other models)
• AM/FM auto tuning
• RDS radio data
• Direct tuning
• Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry
• Powered Zone 2 capability
• Bi-amp and bridging capability for front speakers
• WRAT (Wide Range Amplifier Technology)
• VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry) on all
Others
*1
• Network-ready for playing music files on a networked
computer or media server, or for listening to Internet
radio
channels
• Massive High Current Power Supply (H.C.P.S.) trans-
former
• USB port for playing music files on USB mass storage
devices (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players)
• Supports MP3, WMA, WAV, and M4A file formats
Processing
*12
*1
• Audyssey MultEQ XT room correction
• THX Surround EX
*2
• Easy-to-use onscreen setup menus
• IR IN A/B and OUT
• THX Ultra2 certified
*3
• Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital
• 12V TRIGGER OUT A, B, C
• Preprogrammed remote controller for use with other
AV components, with Learning and Macro functions
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx
• DTS , DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-HD
*4
MasterAudio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS 96/24,
DTS Neo:6
*5
• Neural Surround , THX-Neural
*1
*6
• Theater-Dimensional virtual surround sound
VLSC and the VLSC logo are registered trademarks of Onkyo
Corporation.
• DSD Direct
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converters
• Powerful and highly accurate 32-bit DSP processing
• Re-EQ function
*2
*7
• Tone control on all channels (7.1)
• 15-band EQ on 7 channels, 5-band EQ on subwoofer
THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be reg-
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround EX
is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.
Audio/Video
*3
• Zone 2 with level, tone, balance, and left, right, and
subwoofer pre outs, and composite video output, and
component video output (assignable).
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
• Zone 3 with level, balance, and left, right, and sub-
woofer pre outs
*4
*8
• 4 HDMI inputs, 2 outputs (Version 1.3a)
• HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,
and component sources (720p, 1080i, 1080p capable)
• Component video upconversion of composite video
and S-Video sources
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc., and “DTS-HD
Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
*5
• Composite video to S-Video and S-Video to compos-
ite video conversion
• 6 digital inputs (3 optical, 3 coaxial), 1 output (optical)
• 3 component video inputs, 2 outputs
• 6 S-Video inputs, 2 outputs
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Cor-
poration, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be reg-
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
*6
• RS-232 control
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
• Color-coded, assignable 7.1 multichannel input
• 7.1-channel pre out
*7 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX
Ltd.
*8
Tuner
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Inter-
face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-
ing, LLC.
*9
• XM Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)
* XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required; sold separately.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supplied Accessories
Features—Continued
Make sure you have the following accessories:
*9
XM Ready® is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
*10
©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS,” SiriusConnect,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.Available only in the contiguous
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)
*11
HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From
iBiquity Digital Corporation. “iBiquity Digital” and the “HD
Radio” and “HD” Symbols are registered trademarks of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation. “HD Radio” is a trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.
Speaker setup microphone
Indoor FM antenna
*12
Manufactured under license fromAudyssey Laboratories. U.S.
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trade-
mark of Audyssey Laboratories.
THX Ultra2
AM loop antenna
Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2
certified, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and per-
formance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX
Ultra2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home The-
ater products you purchase will give you superb perfor-
mance for many years to come. THX Ultra2 requirements
define hundreds of parameters, including power amplifier
performance, and pre-amplifier performance and opera-
tion for both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2
receivers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g.,
THX Mode) which accurately translate movie
Power cord
(Power cord varies from country to country.)
soundtracks for home theater playback.
1
*
*
AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
2
3
Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
Speaker Cable
*
*
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corpora-
tion.
Speaker cable labels
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Mobile, Windows Media,
ActiveSync, DirectX, and Internet Explorer are either regis-
tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the same
regardless of color.
*
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission
from Microsoft Corporation.
*
*
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technol-
ogy must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and
is intended for home and other limited consumer uses
only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiroom Capability
You can use three speaker systems with this AV receiver—a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1 channels) in
your main listening room, a stereo speaker system in a second room, or Zone 2, as we call it, and another stereo
speaker system in a third room that we call Zone 3. And, you can select a different audio source for each room.
Main Room: In your main listening room, you can enjoy up to 7.1-channel playback (see pages 22–26).
You can enjoy the various listening modes such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (see pages 88–94).
*While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback is reduced to 5.1-channels (see page 124).
Zone 2: In your Zone 2 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback and video playback (see page 124).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
Zone 3: In your Zone 3 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 125).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required.
Main Room
Surround back left and right
speakers
Front left and right speakers
*While Powered Zone 2 is being
used, nothing is output by these
speakers (page 126).
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Surround left and right speakers
Zone 2 Room
Zone 3 Room
Left and right
stereo speakers
Left and right
stereo speakers
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver
Front Panel
North American model
1 2 456
7 8 9J K L MN
O
P
Q RSTU
V
W
XY
Z
Other models
J
3
The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.
A Standby/On button (46)
C Ready indicator (114)
Sets the AV receiver to On or Standby.
North American model doesn’t have this indicator.
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and
HDMI Power Control is enabled.
B Standby indicator (46)
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and
flashes while a signal is being received from the
remote controller.
D Zone 2 indicator (128)
Flashes when Zone 2 is being set. Lights up when
Zone 2 is on.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
E Zone 3 indicator (128)
Zone 3 is on.
R Phones jack (84)
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan-
dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.
F Remote-control sensor (15)
S HDMI Out (49)
Receives control signals from the remote controller.
Used to set the HDMI Monitor setting.
G Stereo button (88)
T USB port
A USB mass storage device, such as a USB flash
drive or MP3 player, containing music files (MP3,
WMA, WAV, M4A) can be plugged in here and the
music selected and played through the AV receiver.
H Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons (88)
Select the listening modes.
I Display
U Audio Selector button (85)
multichannel.
See “Display” on page 11.
Adjusts the display brightness.
V Tone, Plus [+], and Minus [–] buttons (87,
129)
On models other than the North American model,
this is the RT/PTY/TP button, and it’s used with
North American model)” on page 65.
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble), and the
volume and balance of Zone 2 and Zone 3.
W Input selector buttons (62)
K Memory button (82)
Select the following input sources: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, Game/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,
Tape, Tuner, CD, Phono, Net/USB.
L Tuning Mode button (63)
Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode for AM
and FM radio.
X Return button
Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup
menu.
M Display button (84)
Displays various information about the currently
selected input source.
Y Setup Mic (55)
The automatic speaker setup microphone connects
here.
N Setup button
Opens and closes the onscreen setup menus, which
are displayed on the connected TV.
Z AUX 2 Input (41, 95)
Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so
on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,
S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.
O Tuning, Preset, Arrow, and Enter buttons
When AM or FM is selected, the Tuning [ ] [
buttons are used for radio tuning, and the Preset
]
[
(see page 82). With the onscreen setup menus, they
work as arrow buttons and are used to select and set
items. The Enter button is also used with the
onscreen setup menus.
P Master Volume control (62)
Sets the volume of the AV receiver to –∞ dB,
–81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through +18.0 dB (relative dis-
play).
The volume level can also be displayed as an abso-
lute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 111.
Q Zone 2, Zone 3, Level [ ]/[ ], and Off
buttons (128, 129)
The Zone 2 button is used when setting Zone 2.
The Zone 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.
The Level Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons are used
when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
The Off button is used to turn off Zone 2 or Zone 3.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
Display
1 234
5 6
7 8
9
0 A B
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
AUTO (63): Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is
ual Tuning mode is selected.
1Speaker/channel indicators
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels
used by the current input source.
–
: A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for
speakers that are set to No or None.
TUNED (63): Lights up when tuned to a radio sta-
tion.
FM STEREO (63): Lights up when tuned to a ste-
reo FM station.
The following abbreviations indicate which audio
channels are included in the current input signal.
6SLEEP indicator (84)
– FL: Front left
– C: Center
– FR: Front right
– SL: Surround left
– LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)
– SR: Surround right
– SBL: Surround back left
– SB: Surround back
– SBR: Surround back right
Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.
7Audyssey indicator (55)
Lights up during automatic speaker setup.
8Headphone indicator (84)
into the PHONES jack.
9Message area
Displays various information.
0Audio input indicators (67, 85)
Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the
audio source: NETWORK, HDMI, USB, ANA-
LOG, or DIGITAL.
2BTL indicator (page 47)
Lights up when the Speaker Type setting is set to
BTL for bridged front speaker operation.
3ZONE 2 indicator (page 128)
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being
received, the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an
the ANALOG indicator lights up.
Lights up when Powered Zone 2 is being used.
4Listening mode and format indicators (88)
Show the selected listening mode and audio input
signal format.
AVolume level (62)
5Tuning indicators (63)
Displays the volume level.
HD (North American model only) (67): Lights
up if the current AM or FM station supports HD
Radio technology.
BMUTING indicator (83)
Flashes while the AV receiver is muted.
SPS (North American model only) (68):
Lights up when tuned to a HD Radio station that’s
transmitting secondary multicast channels.
RDS (not North American model) (65):
Lights up when tuned to a radio station that supports
RDS (Radio Data System).
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
Rear Panel
North American model
89
L
1 2 3 4 5
67
J
N O P
Q
R
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
XM
1
RS232
MAIN
HD RADIO
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
SIRIUS
2
3
2
1
AM
Y
MONITOR
OUT
ZONE
OUT
2
DVD
IR
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
ANTENNA
V
V
B
C
AC OUTLET
CB/PB
REMOTE
CONTROL
FM
75
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
SW
L
S
OUT
A
B
S
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
MULTI CH
PRE OUT
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
SURR L
FRONT L
ZONE2 L
OUT
(BTL)
(BTL)
FRONT R
FRONT
L
g
S T U
V W X Y Za b c d
e
f
h
Other models
K
M
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
IR
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
V
V
B
C
REMOTE
CB/PB
CR/PR
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
SW
L
S
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
MULTI CH
PRE OUT
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
ZONE2 L
SURR L
FRONT L
OUT
(BTL)
(BTL)
FRONT R
FRONT
L
B RS232
A
REMOTE CONTROL
(Remote Interactive) jack can be con-
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to home
automation equipment and external controllers.
This
nected to the
jack on another
-capable Inte-
gra/Onkyo component for remote and system
control.
C PHONO IN
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.
To use
, you must make an analog audio connec-
tion (RCA) between the AV receiver and the other
component, even if they are connected digitally.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
D COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3
such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR (dig-
ital video recorder). They’re assignable, which
means you can assign each one to an input selector
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input
Setup” on page 51.
O 12V TRIGGER OUT (A/B/C)
ger inputs on other components.
P ETHERNET
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to your
Ethernet network (e.g., router or switch) for playing
music files on a networked computer or media
server, or for listening to Internet radio.
E COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1
This RCA component video output is for connect-
ing a TV or projector with a component video input.
Q AM and FM ANTENNA (HD Radio) (on North
American model)
The AM push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna. The FM jack is for connecting an FM
antenna.
F COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/
ZONE 2 OUT
This RCA component video output is for connect-
ing a TV or projector with a component video input
located in your main listening room or Zone 2.
R AC INLET
The supplied power cord is connected here. The
other end of the power cord should be connected to
a suitable wall outlet.
G HDMI IN 1–4, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) con-
nections carry digital audio and digital video.
S DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3
ing components with a coaxial digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-
able, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 52.
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re
assignable, which means you can assign each one to
an input selector to suit your setup. See “HDMI
Input Setup” on page 50.
T DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT
components with an optical digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-
able, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 52.
The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or pro-
jector with an HDMI input.
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital
antenna, sold separately (see page 74).
I XM antenna (on North American model)
This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and
Home Dock, sold separately (see page 69).
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as
a CD recorder.
J MONITOR OUT
U GND screw
The S-Video or composite video jack should be
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground
wire.
K AM ANTENNA (not North American model)
These push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna.
V CD IN
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD
player’s analog audio output.
L ZONE 2 OUT
W TAPE IN/OUT
This composite video output can be connected to a
video input on a TV in Zone 2.
These analog audio input and output jacks are for
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input and
output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder, etc.
M FM ANTENNA (not North American model)
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.
X AUX 1 IN
A VCR for playback only or other video source can
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite
video input jacks for connecting the video signal.
N IR IN A/B and OUT
A commercially available IR receiver can be con-
nected to the IR IN A or B jack, allowing you to
control the AV receiver while you’re in Zone 2, or
control it when it’s out of sight, for example,
installed in a cabinet.
Y GAME/TV IN
A game console or TV output can be connected
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input
jacks for connecting the video signal.
A commercially available IR emitter can be con-
nected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)
remote control signals through to other components.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
Z CBL/SAT IN
A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.
There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks
for connecting the video signal.
a VCR/DVR IN/OUT
A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be
connected here for recording and playback. There’s
S-Video and composite video input and output jacks
for connecting the video signal.
b DVD IN
This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s
S-Video and composite video input jacks for con-
necting the video signal.
c FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, and SURR
BACK L/R SPEAKERS
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal
posts can be used with front speakers and surround
back speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp or
bridge the front speakers. See “Bi-amping the Front
Speakers” on page 25 and “Bridging the Front
Speakers” on page 26.
d MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio out-
put, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or
SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.
e PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER, SUB-
WOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK L/R
This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can
be connected to the analog audio input on a multi-
channel power amplifier for when you want to use
the AV receiver solely as a preamplifier. The SUB-
WOOFER jack is for connecting a powered sub-
woofer.
f PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3. The
SW jacks can be connected to the inputs on pow-
ered subwoofers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.
g ZONE 2 L/R SPEAKERS
These terminal posts are for connecting speakers in
Zone 2.
h AC OUTLET (North American model only)
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply
power to other AV components. The type and num-
purchased your AV receiver.
See pages 22–45 for hookup information.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller
Installing the Batteries
Using the Remote Controller
When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
To open the battery compartment, press
the small hollow and slide open the cover.
1
Remote control sensor
Standby indicator
AV receiver
30˚
30˚
Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)
in accordance with the polarity diagram
inside the battery compartment.
2
Approx. 16 ft.
(5 m)
Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is subjected to bright light, such as direct sun-
light or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this in
mind when installing.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in
the same room, or the AV receiver is installed close to
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote control-
ler may not work reliably.
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.
Slide the cover shut.
3
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an obsta-
cle between it and the AV receiver’s remote control
sensor.
Notes:
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from
leakage or corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-
ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
About the Remote Controller Modes
Receiver/Tape Mode
As well as the AV receiver, you can also use the remote
controller to control your other AV components. The
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use
with each type of component. Modes are selected by
using the Remote Mode buttons.
Receiver/Tape mode is used to control the AV receiver.
It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette recorder
connected via
.
To set the remote controller to Receiver/Tape mode,
press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button.
■ Receiver/Tape Mode
In Receiver/Tape mode, you can control the AV receiver
and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via
.
A
On
Standby
■ DVD Mode
TV
B
C
Input
By default, you can control an Integra/Onkyo DVD
player in this mode. By entering the appropriate remote
control code, you can control components made by other
manufacturers (see page 132).
L
M
DVD
1
VCR/
DVR
CBL/SAT
+
TV CH
-
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
■ CD/CDR/MD Mode
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
By default, you can control an Integra/Onkyo CD player
in this mode. By entering the appropriate remote control
code, you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 132).
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
D
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
■ Dock Mode
CDR/MD/Dock
Receiver
N
O
TV
Cable
SAT
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock. By default, you can control an RI Dock that has
a remote control sensor, such as the DS-A2. To control
Net/USB
Tape/AMP
Dimmer
5
F
, you must enter the
+
appropriate remote control code first (see page 132).
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
G
P
■ TV and VCR Modes
-
With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You
page 132).
H
I
Q
R
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
■ Cable/SAT Mode
1
In Cable/SAT mode, you can control a cable or satellite
TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote con-
trol code first (see page 132).
Playlist
Rec
Random
Listening Mode
Surround
Stereo
■ Net/USB Mode
J
K
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
computer, media server, or USB mass storage device, or
for listening to Internet radio.
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level
-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
S
T
■ Zone 2/Zone 3 Modes
VCR
These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see
page 128).
RC-688M
U
Use the Remote Mode buttons to select a
mode.
1
Use the buttons supported by that mode
2
Note:
to control the component.
Receiver/Tape mode: see right column
DVD mode: see page 18
• Some of the remote controller functions described in
this manual may not work as expected with other com-
ponents.
CD/MD/CDR mode: see page 19
Dock mode: see page 20
Net/USB mode: see page 21
TV, VCR, Cable/SAT modes: see page 134
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T L Night button (86)
Turns the Late Night function on or off.
A Standby button (46)
U Audio Sel button (85)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
Sets the AV receiver to Standby.
B On button (46)
Turns on the AV receiver.
■ TAPE mode
Used to select the input source.
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.
1Previous and Next [
The Previous [ ] button selects the previous
track. During playback it selects the beginning of
]/[
] buttons
D Macro buttons (136)
Used with the Macro function.
E Dimmer button (83)
the current track. The Next [
next track.
] button selects the
Adjusts the display brightness.
F Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous
and Next [ ]/[ ] buttons may not work prop-
Used to select and adjust settings.
G CH +/– button (82)
erly with some cassette tapes.
Selects radio presets.
Play [ ] button
H Setup button
Starts playback.
Used to change settings.
Rewind and Fast Forward [ ]/[ ] buttons
The Rewind [ ] button starts rewind. The Fast
Forward [ ] button starts fast forward.
I Display button (84)
Displays information about the current input source.
J Listening Mode buttons (88)
Reverse Play [ ] button
Used to select the listening modes. The [Stereo],
[Surround], and Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons
can be used at any time, regardless of the currently
selected remote controller mode.
Starts reverse playback.
Stop [ ] button
Stops playback.
Rec [ ] button
Starts recording.
K Test Tone, CH Sel, Level–, and Level+
buttons (83, 105)
L Light button
or off.
M D.TUN button (64)
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.
N Remote Mode buttons (16)
Used to select the remote controller modes. When
currently selected mode lights up.
O Sleep button (84)
Used with the Sleep function.
P VOL [ ]/[ ] button (62)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver regardless of
Q Return button
Returns to the previous display when changing set-
tings.
R Muting button (83)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
S Re-EQ button (86)
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
A Standby button
DVD Mode
Sets the DVD player to Standby.
To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the
[DVD] Remote Mode button.
B On button
Turns on the DVD player.
C Number buttons
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and
to enter times for locating specific points.
D Top Menu button
Selects a DVD’s top menu.
A
E Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons
On
Standby
TV
Used to navigate menus and select items.
B
C
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
F Disc +/– button
+
TV CH
-
2
AUX 1
5
3
Selects discs on a DVD changer.
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
G Setup button
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.
TV VOL
Net/USB
D.TUN
Phono
H Display button
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Displays information about the current disc, title,
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining
time, total time, and so on.
M
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
I Playback buttons
CDR/MD/Dock
DVD
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse, and Slow
Forward.
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
D
E
Dimmer
N
J Repeat button
+
Used with the repeat playback function.
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
F
K Audio button
-
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-
mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
O
G
H
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
L Open/Close [ ] button
Opens and closes the disc tray.
I
M Clear button
Playlist
Rec
Random
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
P
Listening Mode
Surround
N Menu button
Stereo
Displays a DVD’s menu.
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
J
K
Q
R
O Return button
Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
P Random button
L Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
L
VCR
Used with the random playback function.
S
RC-688M
Q Play Mode button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
R Subtitle button
Selects subtitles.
S Video Off button
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating
any possibility of interference.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
A Standby button
CD/MD/CDR Modes
Sets the component to Standby.
To control an Integra/Onkyo CD player, MD
recorder, or CD recorder, or a CD or MD
player/recorder made by another manufacturer,
CD/MD/CDR remote controller mode.
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code
(see page 132).
B On button
Set the component to On or Standby.
C Number buttons
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating
specific points.
D Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons
Used with some components.
E Disc +/– button
Selects discs on a CD changer.
F Display button
Displays information about the current disc or track,
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,
and so on.
A
On
Standby
TV
Input
B
C
G Playback buttons
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
+
TV CH
-
2
AUX 1
5
3
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
H Rec [ ] button
Starts recording.
TV VOL
Net/USB
Phono
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
I Repeat button
K
Input Selector
Macro
Used with the repeat playback function.
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
J Open/Close [ ] button
Remote Mode
CD
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.
CDR/MD/Dock
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Net/USB
K Clear button
Dimmer
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
L Return button
D
E
Used with some components.
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
M Random button
Used with the random playback function.
-
Prev
CH
N Play Mode button
F
7
8
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
Display
Muting
L
Playlist
Rec
Random
M
N
Listening Mode
Surround
Stereo
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
9
J
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level
-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-688M
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
A Standby button
Dock Mode
Turns off the iPod.
Dock mode is for controlling anApple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock.
B On button*
Turns on the iPod.
To control an RI Dock, press the [CD] REMOTE
MODE button to select the Dock remote controller
mode.
In order to control an RI Dock, you must first enter the
appropriate remote control code (see page 132).
C Top Menu button
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
D Arrow [ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons*
Used to navigate menus and select items.
When Using an RI Dock:
IN L/R jacks.
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or
HDD/DOCK.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see
page 52).
E Album +/– button*
Selects the next or previous album.
F Display button*
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.
G Previous [
] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more
information.
H Pause [ ] button
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it
works as a Play/Pause button.)
A
On
Standby
TV
I Rewind [ ] button
Input
B
Press and hold to rewind.
DVD
1
VCR/
DVR
CBL/SAT
+
TV CH
-
2
AUX 1
5
3
J Playlist [ ]/[ ] buttons*
Used to select the previous or next playlist on the
iPod.
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
K Repeat button*
TV VOL
Net/USB
D.TUN
Phono
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
Used with the repeat function.
11
12
Input Selector
L Menu button*
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Used to access menus.
Remote Mode
CD
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
M Play [ ] button
CDR/MD/Dock
CDR/MD/Dock
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this
button works as a Play/Pause button.)
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
C
4
L
N Next [
] button
+
Selects the next song.
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
5
6
O Stop [ ] button
-
Stops playback and displays a menu.
Prev
CH
P Fast Forward [ ] button
M
Display
Muting
Press and hold to fast forward.
N
O
P
Q
7
8
Q Random button*
Used with the shuffle function.
9
Playlist
Rec
Random
R Play Mode button
J
Listening Mode
Surround
Used to select play modes on components with
selectable play modes.
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
Stereo
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
K
R
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level
-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported
by 3rd generation iPods.
VCR
RC-688M
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
A Number buttons
Net/USB Mode
Used to enter track numbers.
Net/USB mode is for playing music files on a networked
computer, media server, or USB mass storage device, or
for listening to Internet radio.
B Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
C CH +/– button
To set the remote controller to Net/USB mode, press
the [Net/USB] Remote Mode button.
Used to select Internet radio stations.
D Setup button
Displays the URL input screen for Internet radio.
E Previous [
] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
F Pause [ ] button
On
Standby
TV
Pauses playback of music stored on a USB mass
storage device.
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
+
TV CH
-
2
AUX 1
5
3
1
G Repeat button
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Used with the repeat playback function, which can
be used with music files on a networked computer,
media server, or USB mass storage device.
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
H Return button
Input Selector
Returns to the previous display.
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
I Play [ ] button
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
Starts playback.
CDR/MD/Dock
Net/USB
TV
Cable
SAT
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
J Next [
] button
Net/USB
Selects the next song.
Dimmer
K Stop [ ] button
2
Stops playback.
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
L Random button
3
4
Used with the random playback function, which can
be used with music files on a networked computer,
media server, or USB mass storage device.
-
8
Prev
CH
9
Display
Muting
5
6
J
K
Playlist
Rec
Random
L
Listening Mode
Surround
Stereo
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
7
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-688M
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers
Enjoying Home Theater
Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. You can enjoy DVDs featuring Dolby Digital or DTS.
With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes.
You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).
Surround left and right speakers
These speakers are used for precise
sound positioning and to add realistic
ambience.
Front left and right speakers
These output the main sound.Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at
about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly so
as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.
Position them at the sides of the lis-
tener, or slightly behind, about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level. Ideally
they should be equally spaced from the
listener.
Center speaker
This speaker enhances the front left
and right speakers, making sound
movements distinct and providing a
full sound image. For movies it’s used
mainly for dialog.
Position it close to yourTV (preferably
on top) facing forward at about ear
level, or at the same height as the
front left and right speakers.
Subwoofer
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of
the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel.
The volume and quality of the bass output
from your subwoofer will depend on its posi-
tion, the shape of your listening room, and
your listening position.In general, a good bass
sound can be obtained by installing the sub-
woofer in a front corner, or at one-third the way
along the front wall, as shown.
Surround back left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound
and improve sound localization behind the listener. Posi-
tion them behind the listener about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level.
Tip: To find the best position for your sub-
woofer, while playing a movie or some music
with good bass, experiment by placing your
subwoofer at various positions within the
room and choose the
one that provides
the most satisfying
results.
Corner
position
1/3 of wall
position
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
Connecting a Powered Subwoofer
ConnectingYour Speakers
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s SUB-
WOOFER PRE OUT to the input on your powered sub-
woofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re
using an external amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT to the amp’s input.
Speaker Configuration
For the best surround-sound experience, you should con-
nect seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.
The following table shows which channels you should
use based on the number of speakers you have.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
Powered
subwoofer
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
Number of speakers:
Front left
2
3
4
5
6
7
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
B
C
REMOTE
CB/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
ZONE
2
ZON
IN
1
(DVD)
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
CR/PR
S
OUT
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
S
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR BACK
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
Front right
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT L
LINE INPUT
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
PRE OUT
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR
B
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
Bi-AM
Center
OUT
FRONT
R
(BTL)
FRONT
L
(BTL)
Surround left
✓
✓
Surround right
Surround back*
Surround back left
Surround back right
LINE INPUT
SUBWOOFER
✓
✓
PRE OUT
Attaching the Speaker Labels
* If you’re using only one surround back speaker, use the SURR
BACK L terminals.
The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are
color-coded for ease of identification. (The negative (–)
speaker terminals are all black.)
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub-
woofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automati-
cally (see page 55) or manually (see page 101).
Speaker terminal
Front left, Zone 2 left
Front right, Zone 2 right
Center
Color
White
Red
Green
Blue
Using Dipole Speakers
Surround left
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole
speakers output the same sound in two directions.
Surround right
Gray
Brown
Tan
Surround back left
Surround back right
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround left
and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that their
arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the surround
back left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned
so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown.
The supplied speaker labels are also color-coded and you
should attach them to the positive (+) side of each
speaker cable in accordance with the above table.All you
need to do then is to match the color of each label to the
corresponding speaker terminal.
Normal speakers
Dipole speakers
1
TV/screen
1
TV/screen
4
2
3
4
2
3
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
1. Subwoofer
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
6. Surround right speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
Speaker Connection Precautions
• Unnecessarily long or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the
connected speakers is 4 ohms or more but less than 6,
be sure to set the speaker impedance to 4 ohms (see
page 47). If you use speakers with a lower impedance,
and use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long
period of time, the built-in amp protection circuit may
be activated.
• Be careful not to short the
positive and negative wires.
Doing so may damage the AV
receiver.
• Don’t connect more than one
cable to each speaker termi-
nal. Doing so may damage the
AV receiver.
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before
making any connections.
• Don’t connect a speaker to several terminals.
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. Connect
positive (+) terminals to only positive (+) terminals,
and negative (–) terminals to only negative (–) termi-
nals. If you get them the wrong way around, the sound
will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.
Connecting the Speaker Cables
Strip about 5/8" (15
mm) of insulation from
the ends of the
Fully insert the bare wire.
5/8" (15 mm)
1
3
speaker cables, and
twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.
Screw the terminal tight.
4
Unscrew the terminal.
2
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals.
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.
Front right speaker
Center speaker
Front left speaker
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
A
B
C
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK L
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
CONTROL
FRONT R
SURR R
CENTER
SURR L
FRONT L
Bi-AMP
12V TRIGGER OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
SW
L
S
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ZONE2
L
OUT
Surround back
right speaker
Surround right
speaker
Surround left
speaker
Surround back
left speaker
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup
Bi-amping the Front Speakers
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate
tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers that
support bi-amping, providing improved bass and treble
performance.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT R negative (–) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R posi-
2
tive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal to
the right speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-
minal.
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts con-
nect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the
speakers’ woofer terminals.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type setting to Bi-Amp to enable bi-
amping (see page 47).
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
3
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L posi-
4
tive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to
the left speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-
minal.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
IR
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
V
V
A
B
C
REMOTE
CONTROL
CB/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
SW
L
S
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ZONE2
L
OUT
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
FRONT R
FRONT L
Woofer (low)
Tweeter (high)
Right speaker
Left speaker
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued
Bridged Speaker Hookup
Bridging the Front Speakers
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide
almost double the output power for the front speakers.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) ter-
minal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative terminal.
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re
using a powered subwoofer).
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
2
• For bridging, the positive (+) FRONT L/R and SURR
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative
not.
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L
positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative
terminal.
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type setting to BTL to enable bridging
(see page 47).
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-
ers can handle the additional power.
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
3
2
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
A
B
C
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
V
S
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK ZONE
2
ZONE
3
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
R
ZONE2
L
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
OUT
(BTL)
(BT)
FRONT
R
FRONT
L
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
FRONT R
FRONT L
(BTL)
FRONT R
(BTL)
FRONT L
Right speaker
Left speaker
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Antennas
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.
Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position.
2
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without
any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna
to use the tuner.
■ North American Model
Thumbtacks, etc.
AM antenna push terminals
HD RADIO
AM
ANTENNA
FM
75
when using thumbtacks.
FM antenna jack
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead (see page 28).
■ Other Models
AM antenna push terminals
ANTENNA
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna
AM
FM75
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting
the tabs into the base, as shown.
1
FM antenna jack
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.
Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM push terminals, as
shown.
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
they can be connected either way around).
2
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.
1
■ North American Model
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and
that the push terminals are gripping the bare
wires, not the insulation.
FM
Insert the plug fully
75
into the jack.
■ Other Models
FM75
■ North American Model
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Push
Insert wire
Release
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Antennas—Continued
■ Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-
cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as
shown.
■ Other Models
Push
Insert wire
Release
TV/FM antenna splitter
To AV receiver
To TV (or VCR)
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust
the position of theAM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
cords.
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied
AM loop antenna, an outdoorAM antenna can be used in
addition to the loop antenna, as shown.
■ North American Model
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-
cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 28).
Outdoor antenna
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead.
■ Other Models
Outdoor antenna
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna
North American
model is shown
FM
75
Notes:
OutdoorAM antennas work best when installed horizon-
tally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an
attic or loft.
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line
of sight to your local FM transmitter.
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-
ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated
well away from power lines and other high-voltage
equipment.
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-
ards.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components
AV Connection Color Coding
About AV Connections
RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-
channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to
connect composite video inputs and outputs.
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your other AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed
and double-checked all AV connections.
Optical Digital Jacks
Analog audio
Left (white)
Right (red)
Left (white)
Right (red)
The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and
close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Composite video
(Yellow)
(Yellow)
Right!
Caution: To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical
plug straight when inserting and removing.
• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connections
can cause noise or malfunctions).
• To prevent interference, keep audio
and video cables away from power
cords and speaker cables.
Wrong!
AV Cables and Jacks
Video
Cable
Jack
Description
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed stan-
dard- or high-definition digital video and audio and
offer the best picture and sound quality.
HDMI
HDMI
Y
P
P
Y
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best
picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their
component video jacks slightly differently.)
Y
Component
video cable
B
R
P
B
R
C
C
B/PB
P
R/PR
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals and
provides better picture quality than composite video.
S
S-Video cable
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,
and other video equipment.
Composite
video cable
V
Audio
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is the
same as for coaxial.
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
Optical digital
audio cable
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is the
same as for optical.
Coaxial digital
audio cable
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most common
connection format for analog audio and can be found
on virtually all AV components.
L
Analog audio
cable (RCA)
R
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-
channel analog audio output. Several standard analog
audio cables can be used instead of a multichannel
cable.
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
Multichannel
analog audio
cable (RCA)
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
Note: The AV receiver does not support SCART connections.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV Receiver
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV receiver, you
can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV receiver.
: Signal Flow
Video
Video
Audio
Audio
TV, projector,
etc.
DVD player, etc.
Speakers (see page 23 for hookup details)
Which Connections Should I Use?
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.
Video Connection Formats
Video equipment can be connected to the AV receiver by using any one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the HDMI Monitor setting,
which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-
sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to Main or Sub
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to Main or
Sub (see page 48), video input signals flow
through the AV receiver as shown, with com-
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
posite video, S-Video, and component video
sources all being upconverted for the HDMI
output. Use the Main or Sub setting if you
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB, respectively, to
your TV.
IN
AV receiver
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.
MONITOR OUT
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
TV, projector, etc.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to No
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to No (see
page 48), video input signals flow through the
AV receiver as shown, with composite video
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the
component video output. Use this setting if
you connect the AV receiver’s COMPO-
NENTVIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or COM-
PONENT VIDEO MONITOR
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
HDMI
IN
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to your TV.
AV receiver
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video
and S-Video is downconverted to composite
video. Note that these conversions only apply
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.
MONITOR OUT
S-Video
Composite
Component
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video pass through their respective input sig-
nals as they are.
TV, projector, etc.
This signal flow also applies when the Monitor
Out Resolution setting is set to Through (see
page 48).
Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting
When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No
(see page 48), if the Monitor Out Resolution
setting is set to anything other than Through
(see page 48), the video signal flow will be as
shown here, with composite video and S-Video
sources being upconverted for the component
video output.
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
IN
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
analog input signals as they are. HDMI input
signals are not output.
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT
Composite
S-Video
Component
TV, projector, etc.
Audio Connection Formats
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV
receiver by using any of the following audio
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,
analog multichannel, or HDMI.
Audio Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
When choosing a connection format, bear in
mind that the AV receiver does not convert dig-
ital input signals for analog line outputs and
vice versa. For example, audio signals con-
nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.
HDMI
Optical Coaxial Analog Multichannel
AV receiver
2
HDMI
Optical
Analog
Note:
1,
3
3
• Net/USB sources are not output digitally.
1
2
3
Depends on the HDMI Audio Out setting (see page 114).
Only the front L/R channels are output.
Net/USB sources are not output.
*
*
*
MD recorder, etc.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a TV or Projector
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your TV (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
TV
Picture quality
Best
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1
MONITOR OUT S
Component video input
S-Video input
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
MONITOR OUT V
Composite video input
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
GAME/TV IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
c
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
RS232
MAIN
ANTEN
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
AM
COMPONENT VIDEO
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
C
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
V
V
A
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
E
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
b
c
S
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR
B
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
DVD
MULTI C
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
SURR R
A
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Connect one
or the other
TV, projector,
etc.
If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite
receiver to the AV receiver and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV receiver (see
pages 35 and 37).
Hint!
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a DVD player
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the
main left and right outputs for connection
.
a
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
DVD player
Picture quality
Best
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1
DVD IN S
Component video output
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
DVD IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
DVD IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
c
ANTENNA
AM
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
MONITOR
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
V
VCR/DVR
OUT
IR
C
V
A
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
CONTROL
b
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SU
B
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
c
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
MULTI CH
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
SURR R
A
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one
or the other
DVD player
To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a
multichannel analog audio output, see page 34.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV receiver’s multichannel input.
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV receiver’s MULTI CH FRONT
DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the AV receiver’s
SURR BACK L/R jacks.
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Input Setup” on page 53. To
select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 85. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the
multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 114.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
RS232
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
F
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
Y
7.1 ch
5.1 ch
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
IR
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
V
V
A
IN
B
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
S
OUT
A
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
L
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SUR
R
R
SUBWOOFER
OUT
MULTI CH
L
R
L
R
L
R
FRONT
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
SURR
BACK
DVD player
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR (
,
, or ), and then make the connection. If you use
A
B
C
connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to the VCR or DVR in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use and
b
c
a
, or and .)
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2
VCR/DVR IN S
Signal flow
VCR or DVR
Picture quality
Best
Component video output
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
VCR/DVR IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
VCR/DVR IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
c
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
RS232
MAIN
ANTE
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
AM
COMPONENT VIDEO
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
C
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
V
V
A
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
S
OU
b
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR
B
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
MULTI
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
c
A
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one
or the other
VCR or DVR
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection. The video
A
B
source to be recorded must be connected to the AV receiver via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
Connection
AV receiver
VCR/DVR OUT S
Signal flow
VCR or DVD recorder
Picture quality
Better
S-Video input
Composite video input
Audio L/R input
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
A
B
a
VCR/DVR OUT V
Standard
VCR/DVR OUT L/R
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT
Digital optical input
b
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
AM
COMPONENT VIDEO
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
B
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
V
V
A
IN
B
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR
A
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
MULTI CH
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
b
L
R
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIO
IN
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
VCR or DVR
Notes:
• The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby.
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV receiver, connect
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVR’s audio and
video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVR for details.
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the
VCR/DVR OUTV jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via theVCR/DVR
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be
connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Set-top box or Other Video Source
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches the video source (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
Video source
Component video output
S-Video output
Picture quality
Best
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3
CBL/SAT IN S
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
CBL/SAT IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Standard
CBL/SAT IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
b
c
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
AM
COMPONENT VIDEO
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
C
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
V
V
A
IN
B
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR B
B
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
b
c
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
MULTI CH
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
DVD
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
SURR R
A
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Connect one
or the other
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting Components with HDMI
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital
audio, or multichannel PCM).
*1
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), so only HDCP-compatible components will
display a picture.
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:
High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Informational Version 1.3a
Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS-HD Mas-
ter Audio)
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.
About Copyright Protection
*2
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel® for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed
to protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel®, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Making HDMI Connections
Step 1: Use HDMI cables to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD player, TV,
projector, and so on.
Step 2: Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 50.
■ Video Signals
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT
SUB for display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the
HDMI outputs. See “Video Connection Formats” on page 30 for more information.
■ Audio Signals
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV
receiver. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see
page 114).
To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the HDMI Audio
Hint!
Out setting to On (see page 114), and set your DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.
component so that its video can be seen on your TV (e.g., on your TV, select the input to which the
HDMI component is connected). If your TV is not turned on or a different input is selected, the AV
receiver’s speakers may produce no sound or the sound may be cut off.
Note:
• When the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see page 114), or TV Control is set to Enable and you’re listening
through your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV
receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s set-
tings, or turn down the AV receiver’s volume.
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
TV
DVD player
HDMI
HDMI
IN 1
OUT
MAIN
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
AM
COMPONENT VIDEO
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
IR
V
V
A
CB/PB
REMOTE
CONTROL
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
S
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SUR
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Game Console
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your game console (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
a
and .)
b
Connection
AV receiver
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3
GAME/TV IN S
Signal flow
Game console
Component video output
S-Video output
Picture quality
Best
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
Better
GAME/TV IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Standard
GAME/TV IN L/R
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
b
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
RS232
MAIN
ANTE
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
AM
COMPONENT VIDEO
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
C
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
V
V
A
IN
C
C
B/PB
REMOTE
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN 1
(DVD)
R/PR
S
S
OU
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SUR
B
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
IN 3
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
b
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
MULTI
a
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 R
A
L
R
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Game Console
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component
Step 1:Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
Input
b
a
Digital
L
Audio
Input
R
Input
Video
Input
S Video
A
B
VIDEO
OUT
L
AUDIO
OUT
R
S VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Camcorder, etc.
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
Camcorder
AUX 2 Input S Video
AUX 2 Input Video
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
a
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital optical output
AUX 2 Input Audio-L/R
AUX 2 Input Digital
b
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a CD Player
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your CD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ANTENNA
a
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
2
MONITOR
OUT
IN
3
IN
2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
COAXIAL
IN 2
V
b
c
V
A
IN
B
C
IN
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
L
CR/PR
S
OUT
S
A
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
R
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MULTI CH
PHONO
CD
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
OPTICAL
IN 2
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
SURR
R
SURR
L
OUT
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
Connect one or the other
CD player
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,
b
c
use and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
CD
CD IN L/R
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
⇐
⇐
⇐
a
b
c
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
Connecting a Turntable
The AV receiver’s PHONO IN is designed for use with a
moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turn-
table.
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
A
B
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
C
R/PR
S
OUT
S
A
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK
Notes:
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENT
PHONO
CD
TAPE
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
i
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
R
IN
AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, con-
necting the ground wire may produce an audible hum.
If this happens, disconnect it.
OUT
L
R
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car-
tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV
receiver’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.
PHONO
AUDIO
OUTPUT
L
• You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turn-
table with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono
equalizer’s manual for details.
R
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your recorder (
,
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
d
IN
a
COAXIAL
b
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
L
OUT
OUT
SUB
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
IN 2
RS232
MAIN
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
R
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
A
B
C
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
NE
OUT
2
IN
CONTROL
TAPE
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
c
(DVD)
OPTICAL
IN 2
R/PR
S
OUT
SURR SURR BACK F
S
A
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
a
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
L
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
ZONE2
R
R
SURR
R
SURR
R
OPTICAL
d
OUT
TAPE
L
R
L
R
Connect one
or the other
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
OUT
Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.
• With connection , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections and , or and
.
a
b
a
c
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection
.
d
Connection
a
AV receiver
Signal flow
Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder
⇐
⇒
TAPE IN L/R
TAPE OUT L/R
Analog audio L/R output
Analog audio L/R input
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Digital optical input
⇐
⇐
⇒
b
c
d
Connecting a Power Amplifier
MAIN
SUB
If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and
use the AV receiver solely as a preamp, connect the amp
to the PRE OUT jacks, and connect all speakers and the
subwoofer to the power amplifier. If you have a powered
subwoofer, connect it to the AV receiver’s PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER jack.
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
A
B
C
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
SW
L
S
OUT
S
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT L
PRE OUT
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
SURR
R
SURR
L
OUT
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
1. Subwoofer
6. Surround right speaker
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FRONT
CENTER
SR
SURR BACK
SUBWOOFER
Power amplifier
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting an RI Dock
■ IfYour iPod Supports Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks, and connect
its video output jack to the AV receiver’s GAME/TV
IN V jack.
■ IfYour iPod Doesn’t Support Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks.
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)
IN
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
L
GAME/TV
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
HDMI
V
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
I
R
Y
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
COONENT VIDEO
IN IIN 1(DVD)
V
2
3
REMOTE
CB/PB
1
GAME/TV
CONTROL
Y
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
IN
1
(DVD)
V
CR/PR
REMOTE
C
B/PB
S
IN
CONTROL
IN
IN
OT
IN
IN
IN
IN
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
IN
1
(DVD)
L
CR/PR
S
(CBL/SAT)
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
R
R
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
3
1
2
OPTICAL
L
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
R
(CBL/SAT)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
GAME/TV
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
OUT
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
OUT
• Connect its video output jack to the AV receiver’s
GAME/TV IN S jack.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before
using the AV receiver’s remote controller for the first
time (see page 132).
Notes:
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an
cable (see page 45).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD/DOCK.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see page 52).
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components (North American model only)
The AV receiver has AC outlets on its rear panel that can be used to connect
AC INLET
the power cords of other components that you intend to use with the AV
receiver. These components can then be left turned on so that they turn on and
off as and when the AV receiver is set to On or Standby.
Caution:
AC OUET
AC 120V Hz
SWIT
120W
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that you connect to the
AC OUTLETS does not exceed the stated capacity (e.g., TOTAL 120 W).
Note:
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable (page 114), the AC outlets
are on all the time regardless of whether the AV receiver is set to On or
Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any components connected to them
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
cannot be turned on or off automatically.
• Integra/Onkyo components connected via
the AV receiver.
should be connected directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on
Connecting an External Controller
The AV receiver can be controlled externally by connecting an external controller. The controller can be connected to
the AV receiver’s RS232 port or ETHERNET port. If a controller is connected to the ETHERNET port, in the Network
settings (page 122), set the Control setting to Enable, and set the Port number as required.
Refer to your controller’s instruction manual for details on which AV receiver functions can be controlled and operating
information.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ConnectingYour Components—Continued
Connecting Integra/Onkyo
Components
Step 1: Make sure that each Integra/Onkyo component is connected to the AV receiver with an analog audio cable
(RCA).
Step 2: Make the necessary
connections (see illustration below).
Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 52).
With
(Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:
Auto Power On/Standby
When you start playback on a component connected via
on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV receiver is set to Standby, all components
connected via will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an AC
, if the AV receiver is on Standby, it will automatically turn
OUTLET on the AV receiver.
Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected via
, the AV receiver automatically selects that component as
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV receiver’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the
[Audio Selector] button repeatedly and select Multich to hear all channels (see page 85), as the Direct Change
function selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.
Remote Control
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control your other
-capable Integra/Onkyo components.You must
enter the appropriate remote control code first (see page 133). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV
receiver and not the other component.
Notes:
IN
• Use only
cables for
connections.
cables
L
are supplied with Integra/Onkyo players (DVD, CD,
etc.).
R
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
CD
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
AM
FM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
MONITOR
OUT
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
A
B
C
• Some components have two
nect either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is
for connecting additional -capable components.
jacks. You can con-
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
IN
CONTROL
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
FRONT
S
S
OUT
A
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK F
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
VCR/DVR)
L
L
L
CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
REMOTE
CONTROL
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
-
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
R
OUT
• Connect only Integra/Onkyo components to
jacks. Connecting other manufacturer’s components
may cause a malfunction.
DVD
e.g., CD player
• Some components may not support all
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Inte-
gra/Onkyo components.
functions.
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
e.g., DVD player
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power
On/Standby and Direct Change
work.
functions do not
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
Connecting the Power Cord
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.
• Connect the power cord to the AV receiver’s AC INLET.
• Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On the AV Receiver
• North American model
• Other models
Standby
On
Standby/On
Standby/On
On
Standby
TV
Standby indicator
Standby indicator
Input
DVD
1
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
Receiver
Cable
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Turning On and Standby
On the AV receiver, press the [Standby/On] button.
Remote
AV receiver
controller
On the remote controller, press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button, fol-
lowed by the [On] button.
The AV receiver comes on, the display lights up, and the Standby indicator goes off.
Receiver
or
Pressing the remote controller’s [On] button again will turn on any components con-
nected via
.
On
To turn the AV receiver off, press the [Standby/On] button, or press the remote con-
troller’s [Standby] button. The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent any
loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV receiver, turn down the volume before
you turn it off.
To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV
receiver before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.
■ Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on page 55.
If you did, see “HDMI Monitor Setup” on page 48.
■ Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,
Y
HDMI
component video input, or digital audio input?
COAXIAL
PB
Input Setup” on page 51, or “Digital Input Setup” on page 52 respec-
PR
OPTICAL
tively.
■ Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI
OUT
IN
Dock?
If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 52.
TAPE
MD recorder, CD recorder,
RI Dock
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV receiver for the very first time.
Speaker Settings
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
buttons to select“1. Speaker Set-
tings,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Settings menu appears.
If you change these settings, you must run the auto-
Enter
matic speaker setup again (see page 55).
2-1.Speaker Settings
Speaker Impedance
Speakers Type
6ohms
Normal
2
1
2
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
Enter
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
1
Dimmer
2, 3
1, 6
2–5
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Speaker
]
-
4
5
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
Impedance,”and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
4 ohms: Select if the impedance of any
speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6.
6 ohms: Select if the impedances of all
speakers are between 6 and
16 ohms.
Enter
Random
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6, set the Speaker Impedance to 4 ohms.
To use bi-amping or bridging, you must change the
Speaker Type setting. For hookup information, see pages
25 and 26.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“SpeakerType,”
and use the Left and Right
]
Notes:
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
feed up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
up to 2.1 speakers in the main room.
Normal: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front speakers
normally.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the vol-
ume.
Bi-Amp:Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front speakers for
bi-amped operation.
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be
slightly different from what you see on your TV.
BTL: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front speakers for
bridged operation. The BTL
indicator will appear on the
display.
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-
lowed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
Receiver
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
6
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
]
2
Note:
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
Enter
Enter
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
HDMI Monitor Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
3
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [Enter].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
Enter
On
Standby
TV
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
Enter
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “1. Monitor
Out,” and then press [Enter].
The Monitor Out menu appears.
]
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
1
Enter
Dimmer
2, 3
1, 6
2–5
1-1.Monitor Out
+
CH
HDMI Monitor
Resolution
Monitor Out2
Yes
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Enter
Display
Muting
Playlist
Rec
Random
ning Mode
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“HDMI Monitor,”
and use the Left and Right
]
4
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1,
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2
OUT, S MONITOR OUT, or
V MONITOR OUT.
Main: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
MAIN.
Sub: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
SUB.
If you connect your TV to a video output other than the
HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB, set the HDMI
Monitor setting to No so that the onscreen setup menus
are displayed and composite video and S-Video sources
are upconverted and output by the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 and COMPONENTVIDEO
MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT.
Enter
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, set the HDMI Monitor setting to
Main or Sub, respectively, so that the onscreen setup
menus are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and
component video sources are upconverted and output by
the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-
puts and COMPONENT VIDEO outputs and have the
AV receiver upconvert the picture resolution as neces-
sary to match the resolution supported by your TV.
Note:
• When Main or Sub is selected, the
onscreen setup menus are output by
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re
not using the HDMI outputs and
select Main or Sub by mistake and
the menus disappear, press the AV
receiver’s [HDMI Out] button so
that “HDMI Monitor: No”
appears on the display.
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-
lowed by the [Setup] button.
1
Receiver
The main menu appears onscreen.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
• See page 30 for charts showing how the HDMI Moni-
tor setting affects the video signal flow through the AV
receiver.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Resolution,”
and use the Left and Right
]
5
Enter
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Through: Select this to pass video
through the AV receiver at the
same resolution and with no
conversion (default).
Auto: Select this to have the AV
receiver automatically con-
vert video at resolutions not
supported by your TV. (Not
available when the HDMI
Monitor setting is set to No.)
480p: Select this for 480p output
and video conversion as nec-
essary.
Using the HDMI Out Button
The HDMI Monitor setting can also be set to No, Main,
or Sub by using the [HDMI Out] button on the AV
receiver.
Enter
1, 2
720p: Select this for 720p output
and video conversion as nec-
essary.
1080i: Select this for 1080i output
and video conversion as nec-
essary.
1080p: Select this for 1080p output
and video conversion as nec-
essary. (Not available when
the HDMI Monitor setting is
set to No.)
Press the [HDMI Out] button.
The current setting is displayed.
1
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Monitor Out2,”
and use the Left and Right
]
6
Press the [HDMI Out] button
2
repeatedly to select:
No: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to a video output other
that the HDMI OUT MAIN
or HDMI OUT SUB.
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Monitor: Select this if you’ve con-
nected the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV
or other component in your
main room.
Main: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
MAIN.
Enter
Zone 2: Select this if you’ve con-
nected the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR
Sub: Select this if your TV is con-
nected to the HDMI OUT
SUB.
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV
in Zone 2.
Note:
• When Main or Sub is selected, the
onscreen setup menus are output by
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re
not using the HDMI outputs and
select Main or Sub by mistake and
the menus disappear, press the AV
receiver’s [HDMI Out] button so
that “HDMI Monitor: No”
appears on the display.
When Monitor is selected, the COM-
PONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs the same
video as the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1.
Notes:
• If the video source contains information that restricts
output at high-resolutions, 720p or 1080i content will
not be converted.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“2. HDMI Input,”
and then press [Enter].
]
HDMI Input Setup
3
4
Zone
3
1
2
3
Remo
Enter
DVD
VCR
CD
CDR/MD/Dock
The HDMI Input menu appears.
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
1
Dimmer
1-2.HDMI Input
DVD
---
---
---
---
---
---
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
Enter
-
AUX2
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and use the Left and Right
]
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 1.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 3.
IN4: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 4.
- - -: Select this to upconvert and
output composite video,
By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned. The
following input selectors can be assigned: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,
TAPE, CD, PHONO.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an
HDMI cable, you can set the AV receiver so that com-
posite video, S-Video, and component video sources are
Enter
upconverted ( ) and output by the HDMI outputs. You
*
can set this for each input selector by selecting the
“- - -” option.
S-Video, and component
Composite video, S-Video,
video sources from the HDMI
OUT.
component video
HDMI
IN
( )
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
*
5
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
Notes:
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-
lowed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
input selector.
Receiver
• For composite video, S-Video, and component
video upconversion for the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, the HDMI Monitor setting must
be set to Main or Sub (see page 48). See page 30 for
sion.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
explained here, the digital audio input for that input
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.
See “Digital Input Setup” on page 52.
2
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [Enter].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
Enter
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
Enter
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Component Video Input Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
3
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [Enter].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
Enter
Inp
Macro
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
1
Dimmer
Enter
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
Display
Muting
buttons to select “3. Component
Video Input,” and then press
[Enter].
Enter
t
Random
The Component Video Input menu
appears.
If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COM-
PONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.
1-3.Component Video Input
DVD
IN1
---
---
---
---
---
Enter
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2
By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COM-
PONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selec-
tors (i.e., VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,
AUX 2, TAPE, CD, PHONO) are assigned to the “- - -”
option.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and use the Left and Right
]
4
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a
component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so
that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 1.
verted ( ) and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO
*
MONITOR OUT 1 or 2. You can set this for each input
selector by selecting the “- - -” option.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 2.
Composite video, S-Video
IN
Component video
Enter
( )
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 3.
*
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
- - -: Select to output composite
video and S-Video sources
from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT.
Component video
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-
lowed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Receiver
5
Notes:
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or
2, the HDMI Monitor setting must be set to Main
or Sub (see page 48). See page 30 for more informa-
tion on video signal flow and upconversion.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Input Display
Digital Input Setup
If you connect an
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
-- --- 10
/
Input Sele
Macro
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME/TV jacks, for
to work properly, you must change this setting.
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
1
This setting can only be changed on the AV receiver.
Dimmer
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
1, 2
1, 2
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
list
Random
Listening Mode
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the CD input selector.
Press the [Tape] or [Game/TV]
input selector button so that
“TAPE” or “GAME/TV” appears
on the display.
1
2
These are the default assignments.
Input selector
DVD
Audio input
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX 1
or
- - -
AUX 2
FRONT (Fixed)
- - -
Press and hold down the [Tape]
or [Game/TV] input selector but-
ton (about 3 seconds) to change
the setting.
TAPE
TUNER
CD
- - -
OPT2
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or
DOCK.
PHONO
- - -
or
For the Tape input selector, the setting
changes in this order:
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-
lowed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
Receiver
TAPE → MD → CDR
→
DOCK
For the Game/TV input selector, the
setting changes in this order:
GAME/TV ↔ DOCK
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
Note:
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [Enter].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
• DOCK can be selected for the Tape input selector or
Game/TV input selector, but not both at the same time.
Enter
Enter
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Analog Input Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Digital
]
3
Input,” and then press [Enter].
Enter
The Digital Input menu appears.
On
Standby
TV
1-4.Digital Input
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
---
+
TV CH
-
2
AUX 1
5
3
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
Enter
AUX2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
FRONT
---
---
OPT2
---
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
TV
Cable
SAT
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Net/USB
4
1
Dimmer
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and then use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
COAX1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
Enter
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
COAXIAL IN 1.
COAX2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
Playlist
Rec
Random
Enter
COAXIAL IN 2.
COAX3: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
ening Mode
COAXIAL IN 3.
OPT1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
OPTICAL IN 1.
OPT2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
If you connect a component to the AV receiver’s analog
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the
DVD input selector.
OPTICAL IN 2.
- - -: Select if the component is
connected to an analog
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-
lowed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
Receiver
input.
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
5
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
Notes:
buttons to select“1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [Enter].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
selector.
Enter
• The TUNER input selector cannot be assigned and is
fixed at the “- - -” option.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
“HDMI Video Setup” on page 50, this input assign-
ment is automatically set to the same HDMI IN. And
in addition to the usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,
etc.), you can also select HDMI inputs.
Enter
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Picture Quality Menu
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “5. Analog
Input,” and then press [Enter].
The Analog Input menu appears.
]
3
The new “1–6. Picture Quality” item has been added to
the “1. Input/Output Assign” menu. This menu and its
settings can be accessed just like the other menus. The
settings are explained below.
Enter
1-5.Analog Input
Multich
DVD
■ Picture Mode
DVD-Video disc content originates from either film
(recorded at 24 frames per second) or video intended for
TV (recorded at 30 frames per second). With the default
Picture Mode setting of Auto, the AV receiver automati-
cally detects the type of content and processes it accord-
ingly to achieve the best picture quality. If the AV
receiver detects the type of content incorrectly due to
characteristics of the disc, you can select Video or Film
manually.
Enter
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select an input selec-
tor.
You can assign the multichannel input
to the following input selectors: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or
PHONO.
]
4
5
Enter
Auto: The type of content is detected automati-
cally and processed accordingly (default).
Video: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc
whose content originates from video.
Film: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc
whose content originates from film.
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
■ Edge Enhancement
With Edge Enhancement, you can make the picture
appear sharper.
Off: Edge enhancement off (default).
Low: Low edge enhancement.
Medium: Medium edge enhancement.
High: High edge enhancement.
Notes:
• To listen to the component connected to the multi-
channel input, press the [Audio Selector] button
repeatedly to select Multich (see page 85).
■ Mosquito NR
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
With Mosquito Noise Reduction, you can remove the
shimmering or haziness that sometimes appears around
objects in the picture. Mosquito noise can be an issue
with overly compressed MPEG content.
Off: Mosquito noise reduction off (default).
Low: Low mosquito noise reduction.
Medium: Medium mosquito noise reduction.
High: High mosquito noise reduction.
■ Random NR
With Random Noise Reduction, you can remove indis-
criminate picture noise, such as film grain.
Off: Random noise reduction off (default).
Low: Low random noise reduction.
Medium: Medium random noise reduction.
High: High random noise reduction.
■ Block NR
With Block Noise Reduction, you can remove the block
distortion that sometimes appears in the picture. Block
noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG
content.
Off: Block noise reduction off (default).
On: Block noise reduction on.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Using Audyssey MultEQ XT
Automatic Speaker Setup
(Audyssey MultEQ XT)
Notes:
With the supplied speaker setup microphone, Audyssey
MultEQ XT can measure the number of speakers con-
nected, their sizes, crossover frequencies, and distances
from the listening position and calculate the optimal
speaker settings for you automatically.
• If any of your speakers is 4 ohms, change the
Speaker Impedance setting before running the
automatic speaker setup (see page 47).
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted
automatically when the automatic speaker setup
starts.
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed
while a pair of headphones is connected.
Measurement Positions
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the auto-
matic speaker setup for three positions. Total mea-
surement time varies depending on the number of
positions and speakers.
To create a listening environment in which several
people can enjoy your home theater simultaneously,
Audyssey MultEQ XT takes measurements at up to eight
positions within the listening area.
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during the automatic speaker setup, unless you
want to cancel the setup.
■ 1st measurement position
This is the center position of your listening area, or
the listening position if there’s only one listener.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
the automatic speaker setup.
■ 2nd–8th measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
1
The following examples show some typical home theater
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
prompted.
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
Setup Mic
2, 9
2
Remote
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Enter
,
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
:
:
Listening area
Listening position
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be
slightly different from what you see on your TV.
The speaker detect results
appear.
4
Auto Speaker Setup
Enter
Turn on the AV receiver and the
connected TV.
Next
Retry
Cancel
1
On the TV, select the input to which the
AV receiver is connected.
:Yes
:No
Enter
SP Detect Result
Place the setup microphone at
2
“Yes” means that the speaker was
detected. “No” means that no speaker
was detected.
the 1st measurement position,
and connect it to the Setup Mic
jack.
If you agree with the results, use
tons to select Next, and then
press [Enter].
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
The options are:
Please place microphone at center
of listening area at ear height.
Next: Proceed to the next step.
Retry: Return to step 3 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.
Notes:
• Make sure the microphone is hori-
zontal.
• If there’s an obstacle between the
microphone and any speaker, the
automatic setup will not work cor-
rectly. Set up the room as you would
when enjoying a DVD movie.
The following screen appears.
5
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
• Positioning the microphone close to
where your ears would normally be
will provide the best results.You can
set the height of the microphone by
using a tripod or level table.
Please place microphone at
2nd Position at ear height.
Place the setup microphone at
the next position (see page 55),
and then press [Enter].
Enter
Press [Enter].
3
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more
measurements. This takes a few min-
utes.
Auto Speaker Setup
Enter
Do not unplug
microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now Measuring...
Auto Speaker Setup
Do not unplug
microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now Measuring...
A test tone is output by each speaker in
turn, as Audyssey MultEQ XT deter-
mines which speakers are connected.
This takes a few minutes.
When prompted, place the setup
microphone at the next position,
and repeat step 5.
6
Notes:
• You can cancel the automatic speaker
setup at any point in the procedure
simply by disconnecting the setup
microphone.
• If any extraneous noise is picked up
by the microphone, the automatic
setup may not work correctly, so
keep quiet.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
After the 3rd or 7th measurement, the
following screen appears.
Review SP Distance:Review the
speaker distance settings (see
“Reviewing the Results” on
page 59).
Review SP Level: Review the speaker
levelsettings(see“Reviewing
the Results” on page 59).
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.
7
Auto Speaker Setup
Enter
Next
finish(Calculate)
Please select “Next”, when measuring
next position, and select “finish”,
when ending.
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an option, and
then press [Enter].
Next: Select this if you want to mea-
sure another listening posi-
tion. After the 8th
]
If you selected “Save,” the results are
saved, and the following screen
appears.
10
Auto Speaker Setup
measurement has been taken,
the procedure automatically
proceeds to step 8.
Saving...
Finish(Calculate):Select this if you
don’t want to measure any
more listening positions and
are ready to calculate the
Disconnect the setup micro-
phone.
11
results, then go to step 8.
Auto Speaker Setup
When the measurements are
complete, the following screen
appears.
8
9
Please unplug microphone.
Auto Speaker Setup
Note:
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the
Equalizer Settings (page 106) will be set to Audyssey.
Calculating...
When the calculations are com-
plete, the following screen
appears.
Error Messages
During the automatic speaker setup, one of the following
error messages may appear:
Enter
Auto Speaker Setup
Save
❑ Ambient noise is too high
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
Auto Speaker Setup
Enter
Retry
Cancel
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select an option, and
then press [Enter].
Ambient noise is too high.
Save: Save the calculated settings
and exit the automatic
This message appears if there’s too much background
noise and the measurements cannot be performed prop-
erly. Remove the source of the noise and try again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.
speaker setup.
Review SP Config: Review the
speakerconfigurationsettings
(see “Reviewing the Results”
on page 59).
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
❑ Speaker Detect Error
Auto Speaker Setup
Auto Speaker Setup
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
:No
:Yes
:---
:No
:Yes
:---
:Error
:Error
Speaker Detect Error
Speaker Detect Error
There is a problem with the front left speaker. If the
warning triangle ( ) appears for the subwoofer, it may
be that the output from the subwoofer is too loud.
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.
Auto Speaker Setup
Auto Speaker Setup
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
:No
:Yes
:---
Speaker Detect Error
:Error
Speaker Detect Error
A different number of speakers has been detected.
The front right speaker has not been detected.
❑ Writing Error
Auto Speaker Setup
Auto Speaker Setup
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
:No
:Yes
:---
:Error
Speaker Detect Error
Writing Error!
The surround right speaker has not been detected.
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.
Auto Speaker Setup
If this message appears repeatedly, the AV receiver may
be malfunctioning and you should contact the dealer
from whom you purchased this unit.
Retry
Cancel
:No
:Yes
:---
:Error
Speaker Detect Error
The surround back left speaker has not been detected.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually
Reviewing the Results
In some cases, the measurements taken by the automatic
speaker setup may not provide usable results. If running
the speaker setup a second time doesn’t help, you’ll have
to set the speaker settings manually (see pages 101–106).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select the settings that
you want to review, and then
press [Enter].
Enter
Notes:
• For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) cross-
over frequency is recommended. If you use the auto-
matic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select
80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see
page 101).
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
Enter
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds
and the way they interact with a room, THX recom-
mends setting the subwoofer level and distance manu-
ally.
The options are:
Review SP Config
Review the speaker configuration
settings.
Using a Powered Subwoofer
If you’re using a powered subwoofer, as it outputs very
low-frequency sound and its position is usually low
down, it may not be detected by the automatic speaker
setup. In this case, increase the subwoofer’s volume,
select its highest crossover frequency, and then try run-
ning the automatic speaker setup again. Note that if the
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, it may not
be detected, so use an appropriate volume level. If the
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for
details.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Full Band
80Hz
100Hz
150Hz
2ch
Review SP Distance
Review the speaker distance set-
tings.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Distance
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
15ft
15ft
15ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
15ft
Review SP Level
Review the speaker level settings.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Level
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
+12dB
0dB
–12dB
+3dB
+4dB
-6dB
-3dB
0dB
Press [Return] to return to the previous
screen.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
TV Format Setup
(not North American models)
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. OSD Setup,”
and then press [Enter].
]
3
4
Enter
The OSD Setup menu appears.
6-2.OSD Setup
On
Standby
Immediate Display
Monitor Type
Display Position
TV Format
On
4:3
Bottom
Auto
TV
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
Enter
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
Language
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “TV Format,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Enter
1
Dimmer
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Auto: Select this to have the AV
receiver automatically detect
the TV system from the video
input signals.
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
NTSC: Select if the TV system in
your area is NTSC.
Display
Muting
Enter
PAL: Select if the TV system in
your area is PAL.
Playlist
Rec
Random
stening Mode
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
5
For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you
must specify the TV system used in your area.
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-
lowed by the [Setup] button.
1
Receiver
Note:
The main menu appears onscreen.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “6. Miscella-
]
2
neous,” and then press [Enter].
Enter
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
Enter
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
AM Frequency Step Setup
(on some models)
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “3.Tuner,” and
then press [Enter].
]
3
4
Enter
The Tuner menu appears.
7-3.Tuner
On
Standby
AM Freq Step
9kHz
TV
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
Enter
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “AM Freq.
]
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
Step,” and then use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
10 kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are
used in your area.
9 kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used
in your area.
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Enter
1
Dimmer
2, 3
1, 5
2–4
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
Enter
Playlist
Rec
Random
stening Mode
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
5
For AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the
AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when
this setting is changed, all radio presets are deleted.
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-
lowed by the [Setup] button.
1
Note:
Receiver
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
Enter
Enter
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PlayingYour AV Components
Basic AV Receiver Operation
On
Standby
TV
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
+
TV CH
-
2
AUX 1
5
3
3
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
1
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
1
3
Dimmer
1
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Pre
Use the AV receiver’s input selector buttons to select an input source.
1
AV receiver
Remote
controller
To select an input source with the remote controller, press its [Receiver]
Remote Mode button, and then use its Input Selector buttons.
Receiver
Press the [Net/USB] button repeatedly to select Server, USB, or Internet radio.
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
Phono
+10
Net/USB
0
Start playback on the source component.
2
3
4
To watch a DVD or other video source, on your TV, select the video input that’s con-
nected to the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1, COMPO-
NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI OUT MAIN, HDMI OUT
SUB, or MONITOR OUT.
On some DVD players, you may need to change the digital or HDMI audio output
settings.
To adjust the volume, use the Master Volume control or the remote con-
troller’s [VOL] button.
Since the AV receiver is designed for home theaters, it has a wide volume range for
precise adjustment. The volume can be set to –∞ dB, –81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through
Remote
controller
AV receiver
VOL
Select a listening mode and enjoy!
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 88.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio
■ Manual Tuning Mode
Listening to AM/FM Stations
Press the [Tuning Mode] button
so that the AUTO indicator disap-
pears from the display.
1
Tuning Mode
Tuning
Press and hold the Tuning Up or
Down [ ]/[ ] button.
2
The frequency stops changing when
you release the button.
Press the button repeatedly to change
the frequency one step at a time.
Tuner
With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations and store your favorite stations as presets for
easy selection.
The North American model changes FM frequency in
0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz steps for AM. For other models
it’s 0.05 MHz steps for FM and 9 kHz steps for AM.
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Use the [Tuner] input selector
button to select AM or FM.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.
Band
Frequency
(Actual display depends on country.)
Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations
■ Auto Tuning Mode
Press the [Tuning Mode] button
so that the AUTO indicator
appears on the display.
1
Press the Tuning Up or Down
2
[
]/[ ] button.
Searching stops when a station is
found.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator also appears. (The FM STEREO
indicator will not appear on models that have HD Radio.)
TUNED
AUTO
FM STEREO
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Tuning into Stations by Frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-
ing the appropriate frequency.
Displaying AM/FM Radio Information
Display
On
Standby
TV
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
Number
buttons
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
D.TUN
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Press the [Display] button to dis-
play the available information.
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Band
Frequency
Preset #
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-
lowed by the [D.TUN] button.
The [Receiver] button flashes.
1
2
Receiver
Listening mode
D.TUN
Clear
Note:
(Actual display depends on country.)
• When you select a preset with a custom name (see
page 109), its name is displayed instead of the band
and frequency.
Within 8 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the fre-
quency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),
press 8, 7, 5.
DVD
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
1
Game
4
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
/
TV
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
Phono
+10
Net/USB
0
Note:
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,
you cannot select another input source
with the remote controller.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
RDS Program Types (PTY)
Using RDS (not North American
model)
Type
Display
None
NONE
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available. When tuned to an RDS station, the RDS indi-
cator appears.
News reports
Current affairs
Information
Sport
NEWS
AFFAIRS
INFO
RDS indicator
SPORT
Education
EDUCATE
DRAMA
Drama
Culture
CULTURE
SCIENCE
VARIED
Science and technology
Varied
■ What is RDS?
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is avail-
able in most European countries. Many FM stations use
it these days. In addition to displaying text information,
RDS can also help you find radio stations by type (e.g.,
news, sport, rock, etc.).
Pop music
Rock music
Middle of the road music
Light classics
Serious classics
Other music
Weather
POP M
ROCK M
EASY M
LIGHT M
CLASSICS
OTHER M
WEATHER
FINANCE
CHILDREN
SOCIAL
RELIGION
PHONE IN
TRAVEL
LEISURE
JAZZ
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS informa-
tion:
Finance
Children’s programmes
Social affairs
Religion
PS (Program Service)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Press-
ing the [Display] button will display the frequency for 3
seconds.
Phone in
Travel
RT (Radio Text)
Leisure
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text will be shown on the display (see
page 66).
Jazz music
Country music
National music
Oldies music
Folk music
Documentary
Alarm test
COUNTRY
NATION M
OLDIES
FOLK M
DOCUMENT
TEST
PTY (Program Type)
This allows you to search RDS radio stations by type
(see page 66).
TP (Traffic Program)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (see page 66).
Alarm
ALARM
Notes:
• In some cases, the characters displayed on the AV
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be dis-
played when unsupported characters are received.
This is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Displaying Radio Text (RT)
To start the search, press [Enter].
The AV receiver searches until it finds a
station of the type you specified, at
which point it stops briefly before con-
tinuing with the search.
4
5
RT/PTY/TP
When a station you want to listen
to is found, press [Enter].
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text can be displayed.
Listening to Traffic News (TP)
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
once.
2
3
The RT information scrolls across the
display.
Notes:
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV
receiver waits for the RT information.
• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display,
no RT information is available.
1
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
Use the [Tuner] input selector
button to select FM.
2
3
1
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
three times.
2
If the current radio station is broadcast-
ing TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will
appear on the display and traffic news
will be heard as and when it’s broad-
cast. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is
not broadcasting TP.
4, 5
1
You can search for radio stations by type.
Use the [Tuner] input selector
button to select FM.
1
To locate a station that is broad-
3
casting TP, press [Enter].
The AV receiver searches until it finds a
station that’s broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
twice.
The current program type appears on
the display.
2
Use the Preset [ ]/[ ] buttons
to select the type of program you
want.
3
See the table on page 65.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
(North American model only)
-
Tape
7
Tu
8
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conven-
tional analog AM and FM radio stations, with improved
sound quality, better reception, and new data services.
HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for
FM stations and FM-quality sound for AM stations. In
addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple
programs on the same frequency by using multicast
channels. Text data display incudes station name, song
title, artist name, and so on.
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
,
Enter
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
For more information about HD Radio technology, visit:
www.ibiquity.com
Display
Display
Muting
www.hdradio.com
Playlist
Rec
Random
Listening Mode
Surround
Stereo
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
HD Radio stations broadcast on the same AM and FM
frequencies they’ve always used, and you can receive
them by tuning into your favorite station as normal (see
page 63).You can store them as presets just like AM and
FM stations (see page 82).
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level
-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
L
Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
Audio Sel
RC-688M
If the currentAM or FM station supports HD Radio tech-
nology, the HD indicator lights up.
Audio Selector
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being received,
the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an analog HD
Radio transmission is being received, the ANALOG
indicator lights up.
Station name
HD indicator
Display Enter
Song title
Artist name
HD Radio channel number
• If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio
technology, the station’s name will be displayed
instead of the band and frequency.
• When music data is received, song title and artist name
information is displayed.
• If the current HD Radio station supports multicast
channels, the name of the currently selected multicast
channel will be displayed.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Selecting Multicast Channels
Displaying HD Radio Information
FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs
on the same frequency by using what are calledmulticast
channels. If the current HD Radio station is broadcasting
multicast channels, the SPS (secondary program ser-
vices) indicator lights up.
Press the [Display] button repeatedly to cycle through
the available information.
Frequency
Press [Enter].
The SPS indicator flashes.
1
Station information
Artist information
Enter
Use the Up and Down Arrow
2
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a multi-
cast channel, and then press
[Enter] within 5 seconds.
Enter
If you select a multicast channel that is
not currently broadcasting, a plus [+]
symbol will appear, indicating that the
channel has been reserved. When
broadcasting commences, that channel
will be selected automatically.
Song title information
Enter
Reserved channel indication
HD Radio channel number
Note:
• Multicast channels are not available
on AM.
Selecting the Audio Format (Blend Mode)
HD Radio stations transmit both analog and digital ver-
sions of their programs and you can choose which one
you want to listen to.
Remote
controller
Use the [Audio Sel] button to
select Auto or Analog.
Audio Sel
AV receiver
Auto: Select to use the digital sig-
nal.
Analog: Select to use the analog sig-
nal.
Note:
• Multicast channels 2 through 8 only carry a digital sig-
nal, so to select an audio format, you must select mul-
ticast channel #1 first.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner and Home
Dock
®
Listening to XM Satellite Radio
(North American Model Only)
To receive XM Satellite Radio, you need an XM Mini-
Tuner and Home Dock, which includes a home antenna.
These are sold separately. For connection information,
refer to the instruction manual supplied with the XM
Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.
Important XM Radio Information
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of
commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news,
talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior
digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reg-
gae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for
every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the rich-
est selection of music is matched by its passion for
live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute
news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and
much more. For U.S. customers, information about
XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmra-
dio.com. For Canadian customers, information about
XM Canada is online at
XM Mini-Tuner jack
XM
XM
SIRIUS
www.xmradio.ca.
M
2
1
2
Note:
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold sepa-
rately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activa-
tion fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only.
All fees and programming subject to change. Channels
with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL.
Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by
calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and
1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents).
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Enter
Dimmer
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Setup
Display
Muting
For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels
and advertising-supported channels, visit
lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca
(Canadian residents).
Setting the Satellite Radio Mode
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available
at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Cana-
dian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous
United States and Canada. ©2007 XM Satellite Radio
Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must
set the Satellite Radio mode to XM.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
1
Receiver
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
A warning against reverse engineering:
It is prohibited to, and you agree that you will not, copy,
decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manip-
ulate, or otherwise access and/or make available any
technology incorporated in receivers compatible with
the XM Satellite Radio system. Furthermore, the
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
®
2
AMBE voice compression software included in this
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
product is protected by intellectual property rights
including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of
Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The software is licensed
solely for use within this product. The user of this or any
other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly
prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile, reverse
engineer, hack, manipulate or disassemble the object
code, or in any other way convert the object code into
human-readable form.
Enter
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
Enter
6.Network
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “3.Tuner,” and
then press [Enter].
]
3
On
Standby
TV
Input
Enter
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
The Tuner screen appears.
Number
buttons
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
7-3.Tuner
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
Satellite Radio
None
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
Tuner
11
12
Enter
D.TUN
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Enter
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select “XM.”
]
Dimmer
4
+
If there are 2 items on the Tuner
screen,use Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Satellite
Radio.”
Enter
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
]
-
Prev
CH
Muting
Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons cycles through the following
]
options: None → XM → SIRIUS →
XM/SIRIUS
Enter
Selecting XM Satellite Radio
None: Select if you’re not using
satellite radio.
XM: Select to use XM Satellite
Radio.
On the AV receiver, press the
[Tuner] Input Selector button
repeatedly to select XM.
AV receiver
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satel-
lite Radio.
XM/SIRIUS: Select to use XM Satel-
lite Radio and SIRIUS Sat-
ellite Radio.
On the remote controller, press
the [Receiver] Remote Mode but-
ton, and then press the [Tuner]
Input Selector button repeatedly
to select XM.
Remote
controller
Receiver
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Setup closes.
5
If “CHECK XM TUNER” appears on
the display, make sure the XM Mini-
Tuner is connected properly.
Tuner
Signing Up for XM Satellite Radio
Tuning
/
Enter
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner and Home
Dock, you are ready to subscribe to XM Satellite Radio.
You’ll need a major credit card and your XM Radio ID.
There are three places you can find your 8-character XM
Radio ID:
1. On the XM Mini-Tuner
2. On the XM Mini-Tuner packaging
3. On XM Channel 0, as explained below
Tuner
Setup
Use the Tuning Up and Down
1
[
]/[ ] buttons to select RADIO
ID.
Your XM Radio ID number is dis-
played. Write it below for reference.
ID
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Category Search Mode
To sign up, go to:
2
Press the [Receiver] Remote
http://activate.xmradio.com
Or call: 1-800-967-2346
1
Mode button, and then press the
[Enter] button repeatedly to
select Category Search mode.
Receiver
Enter
For XM Canada, go to:
http://xmradio.ca
Or call: 1-877-438-9677
Notes:
• RADIO ID cannot be selected in Category Search
mode. You must select Channel Search mode (see
right column).
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select a category, and
use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
• The following letters are not used in XM Satellite
Radio IDs: I, O, S, F.
]
Enter
• XM Satellite Radio will transmit a special signal to
your AV receiver to activate the full channel lineup.
Activation normally takes between 10 and 15 minutes,
but during busy peak periods, you may need to leave
the AV receiver turned on for up to an hour.
buttons to select a channel in
that category.
Selecting XM Radio Channels
■ Direct Tuning
You can select an XM radio channel directly by entering
its number.
There are three ways to select XM radio channels:
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.
2. Category Search mode: select channels by cate-
gory.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[D.TUN] button.
1
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.
Receiver
Note:
The [Receiver] button flashes.
You can’t select Channel Search mode or Category
Search mode while the Tuning Arrow
are flashing, as tuning is in progress.
indicators
D.TUN
Clear
■ Channel Search Mode
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Within 8 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the channel
number.
For example, to select channel #20,
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [Enter].
1
2
2
Mode button, and then press the
[ENTER] button repeatedly to
select Channel Search mode.
Receiver
Enter
DVD
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
D.TUN
Clear
Net/USB
Note:
12
0
11
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,
you cannot select another input source
with the remote controller.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a channel.
]
Channel number
Enter
Channel name
You can also use the Left and Right
]/[ ] buttons to select a category.
[
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Displaying XM Radio Information
Tuning
/
AV receiver
Memory
Enter
Return
Press the [Display] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
Remote
controller
Display
Tuning Mode
The following information can be displayed:
Display
Channel name
2
↓
Remote
Channel number & preset number
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
↓
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Category → Artist → Song title → Listening mode
Dimmer
Notes:
+
• If the category, artist, or song title is not available,
“- - -” will be displayed instead.
Enter
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
CH +/–
Display
-
Prev
CH
• The listening mode is not displayed when Zone 2 or
Zone 3 is selected.
Return
Display
Muting
Positioning the XM Mini-Tuner System
Selecting Channels on the AV receiver:
You can check the signal strength of the XM radio signal
and adjust the position of the XM Mini-Tuner system
accordingly.
Press the [Tuning Mode] button
repeatedly to select Channel
Search mode or Category Search
mode.
1
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
1
Receiver
Press [Enter] repeatedly to select
a category.
2
3
The main menu appears onscreen.
Use theTuning Up and Down [ ]/
[
] buttons to select a channel.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
]
2
In Channel Search mode, you can
select any channel.
In Category Search mode, you can only
select channels from the currently
selected category.
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
Enter
The Source Setup menu appears.
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Selecting the Previous Channel:
Enter
AV receiver
To listen to the previously
selected XM channel, press the
[Return] button.
Note:
• If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None (see page 70), the “4. Satellite
Radio” item is not available.
Remote
controller
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
❑ UPDATING
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Satellite
Radio,” and then press [Enter].
The Satellite Radio screen appears.
The name of the currently selected
input selector is displayed in a box.
]
3
XM is updating your Mini-Tuner with the latest
encryption code. Wait a few seconds until the update
is done. Alternatively, you may be attempting to tune
to a channel that is blocked or that you cannot
receive with your subscription package. To receive
that channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.
Enter
❑ NO SIGNAL
Enter
The XM Mini-Tuner cannot receive the satellite sig-
nal. Check the XM antenna for obstructions to the
southern sky. Check the antenna positioning with the
Antenna Aiming function (see left column).
Position the XM Mini-Tuner
Antenna so that as many bars as
possible (up to 3) appear on the
XM Satellite signal strength
meter.
The best signal is achieved when the
antenna is pointing to the southern sky
through an unobstructed window.
4
❑ LOADING
The AV receiver is tuning or decoding audio or text
data. Please wait. If this occurs often, check the XM
antenna position with the Antenna Aiming function
(see left column).
❑ OFF AIR
The XM channel you selected is not currently broad-
casting. Select another channel.
4-4.SAT Radio
XM Antenna Aiming
❑ UPGRADE XM TUNER
The connected XM CNP-1000 is incompatible. The
AV receiver features advanced technology that is
designed for use with the XM Mini-Tuner. Contact
XM Listener Care and ask about upgrading your XM
CNP-1000 to an XM Mini-Tuner. Have the AV
receiver’s model name and CNP-1000 XM ID num-
ber ready beforehand, and explain that your AV
receiver is displaying the message “Upgrade XM
Tuner.” If you already have an XM Mini-Tuner con-
nected and you see this message, turn off the AV
receiver, make sure the XM Mini-Tuner is properly
seated in the Mini-Tuner Dock, and then turn the AV
receiver back on again. If the message reappears,
contact XM Listener Care and explain the issue that
you’re experiencing and the corrective actions
you’ve tried.
Satellite
Terrestrial
If you cannot receive a satellite signal,
position the XM Mini-Tuner System so
that as many bars as possible (up to 3)
appear on the XM Terrestrial signal
strength meter.
Notes:
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy
tion.
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.
ellite Radio mode is set to XM or XM/SIRIUS (see
page 70).
❑ CHECK XM TUNER
The AV receiver is having difficulty communicating
with the XM Mini-Tuner module. Make sure the XM
Mini-Tuner is properly seated in the Mini-Tuner
Dock. And make sure the Mini-Tuner Dock cable is
properly connected to the AV receiver and is not
damaged. If the issue persists, contact XM Listener
Care. Have the AV receiver’s model name ready
beforehand, and explain the issue that you’re experi-
encing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS
Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to
XM/SIRIUS (see page 70), signal strength meters for
both systems appear on the same screen.
XM Radio Messages
The following messages may appear while using XM
Satellite radio.
❑ Unavailable Channel
You may be attempting to select a channel that is
unavailable or has changed to a different channel
number. Check xmradio.com for the latest channel
listing.
❑ CHECK ANTENNA
The XM antenna is not properly connected to the
Mini-Tuner Dock. Check the connection. Check the
antenna cable for damage.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
®
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Indoor/outdoor antenna
with 21-foot cable
(North American Models Only)
SiriusConnect
Important SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
SIRIUS is available in the US for subscribers with
addresses in the continental US and is available in
Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. To
Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and
compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold
separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete
and up-to-date channel lineup and information.
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related
marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
AC power
receiver
8-pin mini DIN
connector cable
SIRIUS
SIRIUS
XM
SIRIUS
jack
Note:
Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold
separately. Installation costs and other fees and taxes,
including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscrip-
tion fee is consumer only. All fees and programming
subject to change.
AV receiver
To use the included antenna indoors, you must place it at
a north-, west-, or east-facing window, depending on
where you live. If this isn’t possible, you’ll need to
install it outside, away from any overhead obstructions.
What is SIRIUS Satellite Radio?
TM
Simply The Best Radio on Radio with all your favor-
ite entertainment including 100% commercial-free
music, plus superior sports coverage, uncensored talk
and comedy, world-class entertainment, news, weather
and more for your car, home or office. For more informa-
tion visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca
Positioning the Antenna
For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be
positioned correctly. Use the following map to determine
which area you are in and position the antenna accord-
ingly.
A warning against reverse engineering:
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse
engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated in
receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
system.
SKY
NORTH
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog
logo are registered trademarks of
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
1
4
5
WEST
EAST
3
2
HORIZON
SOUTH
Setting Up the SiriusConnect™ Home
Tuner
Area 1: Point the antenna toward the sky in the east,
northeast, or southeast, either through a window or out-
side.
The optional SiriusConnect Home tuner kit includes
everything for easy home installation, including the Sir-
iusConnect receiver, indoor/outdoor antenna with 21-
foot cable, 8-pin mini DIN connector cable, and an AC
power adapter. See the SiriusConnect Home tuner’s
instructions for more information.
Use the 8-pin mini DIN connector cable to connect the
SiriusConnect receiver to the SIRIUS jack on the rear of
the AV receiver.
Area 2: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or
northeast, either through a window or outside.
Area 3: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or
northwest, either through a window or outside.
Area 4: Point the antenna toward the sky in the west,
northwest, or southwest, either through a window or
outside.
Area 5: Put the antenna outside and point it straight up.
The antenna cannot be used indoors.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Tuning
/
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “3.Tuner,” and
then press [Enter].
]
Enter
3
4
Enter
The Tuner screen appears.
7-3.Tuner
Satellite Radio
None
Enter
Tuner
Setup
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select “SIRIUS.”
]
On
Standby
TV
If there are 2 items on the Tuner
screen,use Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Satellite
Radio.”
Input
Enter
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
]
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons cycles through the following
options: None → XM → SIRIUS →
XM/SIRIUS
]
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
Tuner
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Enter
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
None: Select if you’re not using
satellite radio.
XM: Select to use XM Satellite
Radio.
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satel-
lite Radio.
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Enter
Dimmer
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Setup
XM/SIRIUS: Select to use XM Satel-
lite Radio and SIRIUS Sat-
ellite Radio.
Display
Muting
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
5
Setting the Satellite Radio Mode
Setup closes.
Before you can listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you
must set the Satellite Radio mode to SIRIUS.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
1
Receiver
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio
The main menu appears onscreen.
On the AV receiver, press the
AV receiver
[Tuner] Input Selector button
repeatedly to select SIRIUS.
On the remote controller, press
the [Receiver] Remote Mode but-
ton, and then press the [Tuner]
Input Selector button repeatedly
to select SIRIUS.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
Remote
controller
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
Enter
Receiver
7.Hardware Setup
If “CHECK SR TUNER” appears on
the display, make sure the SiriusCon-
nect receiver is connected properly. If
“ANTENNA ERROR” appears, make
sure the antenna is connected properly.
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
Tuner
Enter
6.Network
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Channel Search Mode
Signing Up for SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Before you can use SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you must
first sign up for an account. You’ll need a major credit
card and your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID, which you can
get from the AV receiver, as explained below, or from the
SiriusConnect Home tuner package.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
1
Receiver
Mode button, and then press the
[Enter] button repeatedly to
select Channel Search mode.
Enter
Use the TUNING Up and Down
1
[
]/[ ] buttons to select
channel 0.
Your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID num-
ber is displayed. Write it below.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a channel.
Channel number
]
2
Enter
ID
To sign up, go to:
http://activate.siriusradio.com
2
Channel name
Or call: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474)
You can also use the Left and Right
]/[ ] buttons to select a category.
[
Note:
• Your ID is also displayed on the Satellite Radio
screen. See “Positioning the SiriusConnect Home
Antenna” on page 80.
■ Category Search Mode
Press the [Receiver] Remote
1
Receiver
Mode button, and then press the
[Enter] button repeatedly to
select Category Search mode.
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio Channels
There are three ways to select SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channels:
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.
2. Category Search mode: select channels by cate-
gory.
Enter
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select a category, and
use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a channel in
that category.
]
2
]
Enter
On
Standby
TV
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
Number
buttons
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
D.TUN
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
■ Direct Tuning
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
You can select a SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel directly
by entering its number.
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Enter
Dimmer
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[D.TUN] button.
1
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
Receiver
-
The [Receiver] button flashes.
Prev
CH
Muting
D.TUN
Clear
Listening Mode
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Parental Lock
Within 8 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the channel
number.
For example, to select channel #20,
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [Enter].
2
With SIRIUS Parental Lock, you can lock out channels
that you do not want to receive and use a 4-digit PIN
number to prevent others from unlocking them.
DVD
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
1
D.TUN
Net/USB
Receiver
Clear
Note:
0
11
12
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,
you cannot select another input source
with the remote controller.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Notes:
• If you select an unavailable channel, “INVALID
CHANNEL” appears on the display.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
]
2
• If you select a channel that you are not subscribed to,
“CALL SIRIUS” appears on the display.
Enter
• Channels that are locked must be unlocked before you
can listen to them. See “Parental Lock” on right col-
umn for more information.
The Source Setup menu appears.
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
Selecting Channels on the AV receiver:
Enter
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Press the [Tuning Mode] button
1
repeatedly to select Channel
Search mode or Category Search
mode.
Note:
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None or XM (see page 75), the “5. SIR-
IUS Parental Lock” item is not avail-
able.
Press [Enter] repeatedly to select
a category.
2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “5. SIRIUS
Parental Lock,” and then press
[Enter].
The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen
appears.
]
3
Use the Tuning Up and Down
3
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a chan-
Enter
nel.
In Channel Search mode, you can
select any channel.
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
In Category Search mode, you can only
select channels from the currently
selected category.
Enter
Enter Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Selecting the Previous Channel:
AV receiver
To listen to the previously
selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel, press the [Return] but-
ton.
Remote
controller
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
8
4
D.TUN
Clear
enter the 4-digit PIN number.
Or
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
]
Notes:
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [Enter].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the PIN number.
• While a channel is locked, it cannot be selected for
listening.
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
• To unlock a channel, you must enter the correct PIN
number and change it to Unlocked in step 6.
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
D.TUN
Net/USB
If you’re entering the PIN number for
the very first time, the PIN is stored,
and the following screen appears.
Clear
0
11
12
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
or
Edit Code
Parental Lock
Enter
If you’ve already set a PIN number, you
must enter the correct PIN to get to this
screen. If you enter the wrong PIN, the
message “Wrong Code!” appears and
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.
Enter
On
Standby
TV
Input
Number
buttons
DVD
1
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
5
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
buttons to select“Parental Lock,”
and then press [Enter].
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
D.TUN
Enter
Input Selector
The Parental Lock screen appears.
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Parental Lock
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Enter
Dimmer
Channel
0ch
Status
Locked
Enter
wwwwwwwww
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
:CHANNEL
:STATUS
:SAVE
:RETURN
ENT
RET
-
Prev
CH
y
Muting
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a channel, and
]
6
7
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select Locked or
Unlocked.
The number, name, and status of the
currently selected channel is displayed.
]
Enter
Changing the PIN Number
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
1
Receiver
When you’ve finished, press
[Enter] to save your changes, or
press [Return] to return to the
previous screen without saving.
When [Enter] is pressed, the confirma-
tion message “Locked” or “Unlocked”
appears.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Enter
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Edit Code,”
and then press [Enter].
]
2
5
6
Enter
Enter
The Source Setup menu appears.
The New Code screen appears.
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
New Code
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Enter
Enter
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Note:
Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
enter the new 4-digit PIN number.
D.TUN
Clear
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None or XM (see page 75), the “5. SIR-
IUS Parental Lock” item is not avail-
able.
Or
DVD
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
1
Game
4
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
/TV
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “5. SIRIUS
Parental Lock,” and then press
[Enter].
The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen
appears.
]
3
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
]
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [Enter].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the new PIN number.
The Confirm screen appears.
Enter
D.TUN
Net/USB
Clear
0
11
12
or
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Enter
Enter Code
Comfirm
Enter
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D.TUN
Clear
Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
enter the old 4-digit PIN number.
4
Confirm the new PIN number by
entering it again.
If you confirm the PIN number cor-
rectly, the new PIN is saved and the
message “Complete” appears.
If you confirm the PIN number incor-
rectly, “Wrong Code!” appears, and
you’ll be returned to step 5 to try again.
7
8
Or
DVD
1
VCR
/DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
Game
4
/TV
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
]
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [Enter].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the old PIN number.
If you enter the correct PIN number, the
following screen appears.
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
D.TUN
Net/USB
Clear
0
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
11
12
or
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Edit Code
Parental Lock
Enter
If you enter the wrong PIN number, the
message “Wrong Code!” appears and
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.
Enter
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Tuning
/
Enter
Positioning the SiriusConnect Home
Antenna
You can check the strength of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
signal and adjust the position of the SiriusConnect Home
antenna accordingly.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Tuner] button, and [Setup] but-
ton.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
Receiver
Tuner
Setup
2
1
2
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Enter
Dimmer
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
]
2
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Source Setup menu appears.
-
Enter
Prev
CH
Display
Display
Muting
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Playlist
Rec
Random
Enter
Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Information
Note:
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None (see page 75), the “4. Satellite
Radio” item is not available.
Press the [Display] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
AV receiver
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Satellite
]
3
Remote
controller
Radio,” and then press [Enter].
The Satellite Radio screen appears.
The name of the currently selected
input selector is displayed in a box.
Enter
Display
The following information can be displayed:
Enter
Channel name
↓
Channel number & preset number
↓
Category
↓
Artist/composer
↓
Song title
↓
Listening mode
Note:
• If the category, artist/composer, or song title is not
available, “- - -” will be displayed instead.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Messages
Position the SiriusConnect Home
4
antenna so that as many bars as
possible (up to 3) appear on the
SIRIUS Satellite signal strength
meter.
The following messages may appear while using
SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
❑ ACQUIRING
The SiriusConnect receiver is acquiring the signal or
no signal is present. Make sure the SiriusConnect
Home tuner is connected properly and that there are
no obstacles close by.
4-4.SAT Radio
SIRIUS Antenna Aiming
❑ ANTENNA ERROR
Satellite
Terrestrial
Make sure the SiriusConnect Home tuner is con-
nected properly.
SIRIUS ID 000000000000
❑ SUB UPDATED
If you cannot receive a satellite signal,
position the SiriusConnect Home
antenna so that as many bars as possible
(up to 3) appear on the SIRIUS Terres-
trial signal strength meter.
Displayed while your subscription is being updated.
No operations can be performed until this message
has cleared.
❑ UPDATING XXX%
Displayed while the channel map is being updated.
Wait until the updating is complete.
Notes:
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy
SIRIUS Satellite Radio by using either satellite or ter-
restrial reception.
❑ UPDATING
Displayed while the SiriusConnect receiver’s firm-
ware is being updated.
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.
❑ INVALID CHANNEL
• The SIRIUS information on the Satellite Radio screen
is only displayed when the Satellite Radio mode is set
to SIRIUS or XM/SIRIUS (see page 75).
Displayed if you select an unavailable channel.
❑ CALL SIRIUS
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS
Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to
XM/SIRIUS (see page 75), signal strength meters for
both systems appear on the same screen.
Displayed when you select a channel to which you
are not subscribed. Call SIRIUS if you want to sub-
scribe.
❑ CHECK SR TUNER
Displayed if the SiriusConnect receiver is not con-
nected. Make sure the SiriusConnect receiver is con-
nected properly, and make sure its AC adapter is
plugged in.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Selecting Presets
Presetting AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS
Stations
Preset
2, 4
3
TV
Cable
SAT
Dimmer
Sleep
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS radio stations.
+
CH
CH +/–
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Tune into the AM, FM, XM, or SIR-
Prev
CH
1
IUS station you want to store as a
preset.
Muting
Press the [Memory] button.
The preset number flashes.
2
To select a preset, use the Preset
]/[ ] buttons or the remote
controller’s CH [+/–] button.
[
+
While the preset number is flash-
CH
3
Disc
Album
ing (about 8 seconds), use the
Preset [ ]/[ ] buttons to select
a preset from 1 through 40.
-
Press the [Memory] button again
to store the station.
4
Deleting Presets
The station is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
2
favorite stations.
Note:
• You can name your radio presets for easy identifica-
tion (see page 109).
Select the preset that you want to
delete.
See the previous section.
1
2
While holding down the [Mem-
ory] button, press the
[Tuning Mode] button.
The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Functions
This section explains functions that can be used with any
input source.
Adjusting Speaker Levels
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listen-
ing to an input source. These temporary adjustments are
cancelled when the AV receiver is set to Standby.
Tun
8
Tape
7
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Use the remote controller’s
Press
[Receiver]
first
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
[CH Sel] button to select each
speaker,and use the [Level–] and
[Level+] buttons to adjust the vol-
ume.
CH Sel
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Dimmer
Display
Sleep
You can adjust the volume of each
speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB
(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).
+
Level
-
Level+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Muting
Display
Muting
Playlist
Rec
Random
Listening Mode
Surround
Notes:
Stereo
• You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is
muted.
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
CH Sel
• Speakers that are set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration cannot be adjusted (see page 101).
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
Level – +
L
Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-688M
■ Headphones
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the
[CH Sel], [Level–], and [Level+] buttons to adjust the
volume of each headphone speaker (left and right), from
–12 dB to +12 dB each.
These settings are stored when the AV receiver is set to
Standby.
Phones
Dimmer
Display
Muting the AV Receiver
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.
Setting the Display Brightness
Press the remote controller’s
[Muting] button.
You can adjust the brightness of the display.
The output is muted and the MUTING
indicator flashes on the display.
Muting
Press the remote controller’s
[Dimmer] button repeatedly to
select: Normal, Dim, or Dimmer.
Remote
controller
Dimmer
You can also use the AV receiver’s
[Dimmer] button (not Australian mod-
els).
AV receiver
To unmute the AV receiver, press the remote control-
ler’s [Muting] button again, or adjust the volume. The
Muting is cancelled when the AV receiver is set to
Standby.
Tip:
You can specify how much the output is muted with the
Muting Level setting (see page 111).
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Functions—Continued
Using the Sleep Timer
Displaying Source Information
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver so that
it turns off automatically after a specified period.
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
Remote
controller
Press the remote controller’s
Press the [Display] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
Sleep
[Sleep] button repeatedly to
select the required sleep time.
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute steps.
Display
AV receiver
The SLEEP indicator appears on the
display when the sleep timer has been
set, as shown. The specified sleep time
appears on the display for about 5 sec-
onds, then the previous display reap-
pears.
The following information can typically be displayed:
SLEEP indicator
Input source
Listening
mode
Signal format*
To cancel the sleep timer, press the [Sleep] button
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.
To check the remaining sleep time, press the [Sleep]
button. Note that if you press the [Sleep] button while the
sleep time is being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep
time by 10 minutes.
Sampling
frequency
*If the input signal is analog, no format information is
displayed. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling fre-
quency is displayed. If the input signal is digital but not
PCM, the signal format and the number of channels is
displayed. For some digital input signals, including mul-
tichannel PCM, the signal format, number of channels,
and sampling frequency is displayed.
Using Headphones
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV receiver’s
Phones jack.
Information is displayed for about 3 seconds, then the
previous display reappears.
Notes:
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the Phones
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone
indicator lights up. (The Powered Zone 2 speakers are
not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it was already set to
Mono, Stereo, or Direct, in which case it stays the
same.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Functions—Continued
Selecting Audio Inputs
Specifying the Digital Signal Format
1 2
Playlist
Rec
Listening Mode
Surround
Stereo
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
L
Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
Audio Sel
VCR
RC-688M
Normally, the AV receiver detects the format of digital
input signals automatically. However, if you experience
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
sources, you can specify the signal format manually.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
off, try the PCM setting.
If you connect a component to more than one audio
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the [Audio
Sel] button to select which audio input you want to use
to listen to that component.
Press the [Audio Sel] button
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewind-
ing a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.
repeatedly to select an audio
Audio Sel
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >
Analog.
Press the [Audio Selector] button
repeatedly to select Auto.
1
IN, and the HDMI indicator
appears on the display. (The
HDMI IN must already be
assigned to the current input
selector. See page 50.)
Auto: Selects the assigned COAX-
IAL or OPTICAL DIGITAL
tor appears on the display.
(The DIGITAL IN must
While“Auto”is shown on the dis-
2
play, use the Tone Plus [+] and
Minus [–] buttons to select:
PCM: Only input signals in PCM
format are output, and the
PCM indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not PCM.
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 52.) If there is no digital
signal, the analog input is
used instead.
DTS: Only input signals in DTS
format are output, and the
DTS indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not DTS.
Multich:Selects the multichannel
cator appears on the display.
(The multichannel input must
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 53.)
Auto(default):The format is detected
automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the
analog input is used instead.
Analog: Selects the analog input, and
the ANALOG indicator
appears on the display.
You can also use the [Audio Selector]
button on the AV receiver.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Functions—Continued
Using the Late Night Function
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you
don’t want to disturb anyone.
On
Standby
TV
Input
DVD
1
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, and then press the
[L Night] button repeatedly.
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital
Plus sources, the options are:
11
12
Input Selector
Receiver
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Net/USB
Receiver
Dimmer
L Night
Off: Late Night function off
(default).
Low: Small reduction in dynamic
+
Enter
Setup
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
range.
Prev
CH
High: Large reduction in dynamic
Display
Muting
range.
Playlist
Rec
Random
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options
are:
Listening Mode
Surround
Stereo
Auto: The dynamic range is con-
trolled automatically based
on the source material and the
current volume setting
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
L
Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
Re-EQ
VCR
(default).
L Night
RC-688M
Off: Late Night function off.
On: Late Night function on.
Notes:
• The Late Night function can be used only when the
input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or
Dolby TrueHD.
Using the Re-EQ Function
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
material that you are playing and the intention of the
original sound designer, and with some material there
will be little or no effect when you select the different
options.
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTS-
ES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema,
THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, and Multi-
channel.
• The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV
receiver is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources,
it will be set to Auto.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the [Re-
Receiver
EQ] button.
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn
off the Re-EQ function.
Re-EQ
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Functions—Continued
Tone Control Settings
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,
center, surround, and surround back speakers individu-
ally. For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.
■ Bass
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
■ Treble
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the Direct
listening mode is selected.
Adjusting the Tone on the AV Receiver
1
2
Press the AV receiver’s [Tone]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble for Front, Center, Sur-
round, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.
1
2
Use the Tone Plus [+] and Minus
[–] buttons to adjust.
Notes:
• The tone cannot be adjusted on the AV receiver when
the Direct listening mode is selected.
• The tone control settings do not apply to the THX lis-
tening modes.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting with the Remote Controller
Selecting the Listening Modes
For a description of each listening mode, see “About the
Listening Modes” on page 93.
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes
can only be selected if your DVD player is
connected to the AV receiver with a digital
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).
Display
Muting
Playlist
Rec
Random
• The listening modes you can select depends
on the format of the input signal. To check
the format, see “Displaying Source Informa-
tion” on page 84.
Surround
Stereo
Listening Mode
Surround
,
Stereo
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
All ST
THX
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Direct
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
• While a pair of headphones is connected,
you can only select the Mono, Direct, or Ste-
reo listening mode.
L
Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-688M
Selecting on the AV Receiver
■ [Stereo] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
Stereo
■ [Surround] button
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listen-
ing modes.
■ Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.
■ [Direct] button
Listening Mode
This button selects the Direct listening mode.
■ [Stereo] button
■ [THX] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
This button selects the THX listening modes.
■ Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.
■ [All ST] button
This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening
mode.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format
Analog and PCM Sources
PCM
Multi
Multichannel PCM
32–96 kHz
*/2
176.4/192 kHz*1
Source format
channel
analog
176.4/
192kHz*1
32–96
kHz
except */2
2ch 1/0, 1+1 Multichannel
2ch
Media
CD, TV, radio
DVD
DVD DVD
Button
Listening Mode
[Direct] Direct
[Stereo] Stereo
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Multichannel
✔
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*3
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX*3
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
✔
✔
✔
✔*3
✔
Neo:6 THX*3
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
[THX]
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
3
*
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
*1. DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.
*4. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, PCM of 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are processed at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
and 88.2 kHz respectively.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DSD, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources
DSD*1
Dolby D
Multichannel
Dolby Digital Plus
Multichannel
Multichannel
Source format
2ch 1/0, 1+1
2ch 1/0, 1+1
except
*/2
except
*/2
3/2
2ch
*/2
*/2
Media
SACD
DVD, DTV, etc.
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Button
[Direct]
[Stereo]
Listening Mode
*2
Direct
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
Stereo
✔
✔
Multichannel
Dolby D
✔
✔
*3
✔*3
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
✔
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*4
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*4
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*5
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLIITHX Games Mode
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
[THX]
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
5
*
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
✔
✔
*1. In listening modes other than DSD Direct, DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.
*2. With the Delay Enable DSD setting on the Direct screen set to No (see page 98), if the source is DSD, the Direct listening mode becomes DSD Direct,
“DSD Direct” appears on the display, and the Speaker Configuration settings are ignored.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.
*4. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*5. Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
TrueHD and DTS Sources
TrueHD*1
DTS, DTS96/24
Multichannel
DTS-ES
Discrete/
Matrix
Multichannel
Source format
2ch
1/0, 1+1
2ch
1/0
except
*/2
except
*/2
*/2
*/2
Media
Blu-ray, HD DVD
DVD, CD, etc.
Button
[Direct]
[Stereo]
Listening Mode
Direct
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Stereo
Multichannel
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
✔
✔
*2
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
✔
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
TrueHD
✔
✔
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*3
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*3
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII THX Games Mode
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
[THX]
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
4
*
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1. 192 kHz TrueHD sources are processed as 192 kHz 2-channel audio, regardless of the number of channels.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, DTS is used.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
*5. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-HD Sources
DTS-HD Master Audio*1
Multichannel
DTS-HD High Resolution
Multichannel
except */2 */2
Source format
2ch
1/0
2ch
1/0
except */2
*/2
Media
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Blu-ray, HD DVD
Button
[Direct]
Listening Mode
Direct
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
[Stereo] Stereo
Multichannel
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
TrueHD
✔
✔
✔
✔
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2
*3
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
*3
Neo:6 Cinema
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX
Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
[THX]
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
*3
*3
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1. 192 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources are processed at 96 kHz.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*3. Depending on the source (e.g., 96 kHz sources), processing may be performed after DTS decoding.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Dolby Digital Plus
About the Listening Modes
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 48 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
Dolby TrueHD
Direct
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete
channels of lossless audio performance with 96 kHz/24-
bit sampling rate and signal resolution.
In this mode, audio from the input source is output
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidel-
ity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are
output as they are.
Stereo
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 2-channel sources up to 192 kHz.
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers.
Mono
DTS NEO:6
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of
some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other
sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DVDs.
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-
nel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels of
matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, providing
a very natural and seamless surround sound experience
that fully envelops the listener.
• NEO:6 Cinema
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
Multichannel
This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel
sources.
• NEO:6 Music
Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-
nel playback. It provides a very natural and seamless sur-
round-sound experience that fully envelops the listener.
As well as music and movies, video games can also ben-
efit from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, Dolby
Pro Logic II will be used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
• Dolby PLIIx Music
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,
TV, VHS, DVD).
DTS
The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for high-
fidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that
bear the DTS logo.
DTS 96/24
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.
DTS-ES Discrete
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks
that use a discrete surround-back channel for true
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-
degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Dis-
crete soundtrack.
• Dolby PLIIx Game
Use this mode with video games, especially those
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.
Dolby Digital
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital
logo and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a
movie theater or concert hall.
DTS-ES Matrix
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks
that use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-
ES logo.
Dolby EX
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital
EX soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.
DTS-HD High Resolution
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 96 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-HD Master Audio
• THX Surround EX
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete chan-
nels of uncompressed digital audio with 96 kHz/24-bit
sampling rate and signal resolution.
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint develop-
ment between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.
Onkyo Original DSP Modes
Neural THX 5.1/7.1
Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic fre-
quency domain processing, which allows delivery of a
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separa-
tion and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-chan-
nel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, includ-
ing video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surround-
sound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Sur-
round on select channels, which the AV receiver can
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.
Mono Movie
This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the
stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a
large hall.
Unplugged
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the
impression of being right in front of the stage.
Studio-Mix
DSD
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acous-
tic image, like being at a club or rock concert.
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format
used to store digital audio on SuperAudio CDs (SACD).
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multi-
channel audio.
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows pro-
duced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire
sound, and clarity to voices.
THX
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent stan-
dards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie the-
aters and home theaters just as the director intended.
• THX Cinema
All Ch Stereo
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire lis-
tening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,
and surround back speakers.
This mode is for watching movies, which are typi-
cally recorded and edited on the assumption that they
will be played in a sizable place like a movie theater.
It carefully optimizes the tonal and spatial character-
istics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the
smaller home-theater environment. It can be used
with 2-channel sources processed with other for-
mats, and multichannel sources. Surround back
speaker output depends on the source material and
the selected listening mode.
Full Mono
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of
where you are within the listening room.
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)
With this mode, you can enjoy virtual 5.1 surround
sound even with only two or three speakers. It works by
controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right
ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.
• THX Ultra2 Cinema
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-
channel playback. It does this by analyzing the com-
position of the surround source, optimizing the
ambient and directional sounds to produce the sur-
round back channel output.
Note:
• Since the Onkyo original DSP modes use the Dolby
PLIIx and Neo:6 circuits for processing, when one of
these modes is selected, the PLIIx indicator, or Neo:6
indicator for multichannel sources, lights up.
• THX Music Mode
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
• THX Games Mode
This mode is designed for use with video games. It
can expand 2-channel and 5.1-channel sources for
6.1/7.1-channel playback.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
This section explains how to record the input source and
how to record audio and video from separate sources.
Recording from Different AV Sources
You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by
simultaneously recording audio and video from two sep-
arate sources. This is possible because only the audio
source is switched when an audio-only input source,
such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video
source remains the same.
Notes:
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot
be recorded.
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input
cannot be recorded.
In the following example, audio from the CD player con-
nected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder con-
nected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
• Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer to
the manuals supplied with your digital recording
equipment for more details.
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital out-
puts, and analog input signals are output by only the
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from
digital to analog or vice versa.
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
Camcorder
Recording the Input Source
video signal
audio signal
Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cas-
sette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be
recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) con-
nected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 29 to 45
for hookup information.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
A
ASSIGNABLE
AM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
MONITOR
3
2
OUT
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
V
REMOTE
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
V
S
CONTROL
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
IN
1
(DVD)
C
R/PR
S
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
Use the input selector buttons to
select the source that you want
to record.
(VCR/DVR)
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
1
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
M
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
OUT
See “Which Connections Should I
Use?” on page 30 to see which signals
can be output and recorded.
(BTL)
FRONT
R
CD player
VCR
You can watch the source while record-
ing it. The AV receiver’s Master Vol-
ume control has no effect on recording.
Remote
controller
Prepare the camcorder and CD player for
playback.
1
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
Prepare the VCR for recording.
4
2
3
4
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
Phono
+10
Net/USB
0
Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.
Press the [CD] input selector button.
This selects the CD player as the audio source but
leaves the camcorder as the video source.
On your recorder, start record-
ing.
2
Start recording on the VCR, then start
playback on the camcorder and CD player.
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD
player are recorded by the VCR.
5
On the source component, start
playback.
3
Note:
• If you select a different input source during recording,
that input source will be recorded instead.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Onscreen Setup Menus
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a conve-
nient way to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are organized
into eight categories on the main menu, most containing a submenu.
Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
4.Source Setup
5.ListeningMode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be slightly different from
what you see on your TV.
Menu Map
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.
Main menu
Submenu
☞ pages 48–53
Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
1.Monitor Out
2.HDMI Input
3.Component Video Input
4.Digital Input
5.Analog Input
4.Source Setup
5.Listening Mode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup
6.Picture Quality
page 54
☞ pages 101–107
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
☞ page 111
6.Miscellaneous
2.OSD Setup
3.12V Trigger
4.12V Trigger
5.12V Trigger
A
B
C
Setup
Setup
Setup
page 47
☞ page 97
3.Audio Adjust
page 60
1.Tone Control
2.Direct
☞ page 113
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
6.Network
☞ pages 108–109
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
page 61
☞ page 115
8.Lock Setup
Lock
Unlocked
☞ page 99
5.Listening Mode Preset
1.DVD
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO
11.NET/USB
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes
Direct Setting
Audio Adjust
Delay Enable
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
■ DSD
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,
delay, etc., processing when the Direct listening mode is
selected.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
Receiver
No: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.
Yes: DSD signals are processed by the DSP.
Multiplex/Mono Settings
Multiplex
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “3. Audio
Adjust,” and then press [Enter].
]
2
■ Input Ch
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi-
plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
broadcasts, and so on.
Enter
The Audio Adjust menu appears.
3.Audio Adjust
1.Tone Control
2.Direct
Main: The main channel is output (default).
Sub: The sub channel is output.
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are out-
put.
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level
Enter
Mono
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [Enter].
]
■ Input Ch
3
4
This setting determines which channel is output when
the Mono listening mode is used with a stereo source.
Enter
The screen for that item appears.
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output
(default).
L: Only the left channel is output.
R: Only the right channel is output.
Enter
■ Output Speaker
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an option, and
]
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right
speakers.
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
The Audio Adjust menu items are
explained below.
]
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker
Enter
(default).
PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings
PLIIx Music (2 ch Input)
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
Enter
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
Logic IIx.
■ Panorama
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Setup closes.
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode.
5
On: Panorama function on.
Off: Panorama function off (default).
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
■ Dimension
T–D (Theater-Dimensional) Setting
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The
default value is 0. Lower settings move the sound field
forward. Higher settings move it backward.
■ Listening Angle
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-
sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.
Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equi-
distant from the listening position and at an angle close
to one of the two available settings.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
sound, move it backward.
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
■ Center Width
30˚
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a
center speaker, the center channel sound is output by
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to
the front left and right speakers to create a phantom cen-
ter). This setting controls the front left, right, and center
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center
channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default
value is 3.
Narrow:Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.
Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees.
LFE Level Settings
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level
can be set to –∞, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).
Neo:6 Music
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB
or –∞ dB.
■ Center Image
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The
default value is 2.
■ Dolby Digital
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital
sources.
■ DTS
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when
the listening position is considerably off center. When
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenu-
ated, maintaining the original stereo balance.
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS sources.
■ Dolby TrueHD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD
sources.
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master
Audio sources.
Dolby Digital Settings
■ Dolby EX
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are han-
dled.
■ DSD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD sources.
■ Multich PCM
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening
mode.
Manual:When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
any of the listening modes compatible with this
format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
etc.).
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Listening Mode Presets
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
buttons to select “5. Listening
Mode Preset,” and then press
[Enter].
The Listening Mode Preset menu
appears.
On the Listening Mode Preset menu, you can specify a
default listening mode for each of the audio formats sup-
ported by each input selector. The AV receiver will then
select the listening mode automatically depending on the
format of the input signal. You can still select the other
listening modes, although the default listening mode will
be used the next time you turn on the AV receiver.
Enter
5.Listening Mode Preset
1.DVD
Enter
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO
11.NET/USB
On
Standby
TV
Input
DVD
1
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an input selec-
tor, and then press [Enter].
The audio formats supported by that
input selector appear.
]
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
3
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Enter
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Dimmer
5-1.Listening Mode Preset DVD
Analog/PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
D.F.2ch
D.F.Mono
All Ch Stereo
PL x Movie
Neo:6
PL x Movie
Full Mono
+
Enter
Setup
Enter
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
If the input selector is assigned to an
HDMI IN, use the Down [ ] button to
select the audio formats shown on the
following screen.
Playlist
Rec
Random
Listening Mode
Surround
Stereo
5-1.Listening Mode Preset DVD
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
Multich PCM
192k/176.4k
Dolby True HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
DSD
Multich
Stereo
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD MSTR
DSD
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
L
Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-688M
For the TUNER input selector, Analog
is the only format available.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an audio for-
]
4
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
1
Receiver
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a lis-
The main menu appears onscreen.
tening mode.
Only listening modes compatible with
the audio format can be selected (see
page 89).
Analog/PCM: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for analog and PCM
sources.
Enter
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for Dolby Digital sources.
DTS: Specifies the default listening
mode for DTS sources.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digi-
tal or DTS.
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listen-
ing mode for mono sources in a digital
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
Multich PCM: Specifies the default
listening mode for multichannel PCM
sources, such as DVD-Audio (input via
HDMI).
192/176.4k: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for high resolution
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,
such as DVD-Audio.
Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default
listening mode for Dolby TrueHD
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the
default listening mode for DTS-HD
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).
DSD Multi: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for DSD multichannel
sources, such as SACD.
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
5
Setup closes.
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
Speaker Setup
1
2
This section explains items on the Speaker Config menu.
Receiver
Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 55).
The main menu appears onscreen.
M
2
1
2
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Dimmer
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
]
+
Enter
Setup
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
Enter
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
-
Prev
CH
2.Speaker Setup
Display
Muting
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
Enter
Ln
Speaker Settings
See “Speaker Settings” on page 47.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Config,” and then press [Enter].
]
3
4
Enter
Speaker Configuration
The Speaker Config screen appears.
2-2.Speaker Config
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
LPF of LFE
Double Bass
Yes
Full Band
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
2ch
Enter
With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency
for each speaker.
120Hz
On
The following crossover frequencies can be specified:
Full Band, 40 Hz, 45 Hz, 50 Hz, 55 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz,
80 Hz (THX), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 130 Hz,
150 Hz, or 200 Hz.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Subwoofer,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
Enter
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-fre-
quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre-
quency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to deter-
mine the optimum crossover frequencies.
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
Yes: Select if a subwoofer is con-
nected.
No: Select if no subwoofer is con-
nected.
Enter
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify
80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Front,” and
then use the Left and Right
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Surr Back,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
5
8
Enter
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
crossover frequency.
If no surround back speakers are con-
nected, select None.
Note:
• Fixed at Full Band if Subwoofer
(step 4) is set to No.
Notes:
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set
to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 47), Sur-
round is set to None (step 7), or Pow-
ered Zone 2 is being used
(page 126).
Enter
Enter
• Cannot select Full Band if Surround
(step 7) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Center,” and
then use the Left and Right
]
6
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
9
crossover frequency.
If no center speaker is connected, select
None.
buttons to select“Surr Back Ch,”
and then use the Left and Right
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
1ch: Select if one surround back
speaker is connected.
Notes:
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set
to BTL (page 47).
Enter
surround back speakers are
connected.
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 5) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
Enter
Note:
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set
to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 47), Surr-
Back is set to None (step 8), or Pow-
ered Zone 2 is being used
(page 126).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“Surround,”and
then use the Left and Right
]
7
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no surround left and right speakers
are connected, select None.
Continue with step 10 on the next page.
Notes:
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set
to BTL (page 47).
Enter
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 5) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel
Double Bass
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to
sources that use the LFE channel.
With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.
This setting can only be made if the Subwoofer setting in
step 4 is set to Yes, and the Front setting in step 5 is set
to Full Band.
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select
80 Hz (THX).
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select Off
(THX).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “LPF of LFE,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
10
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Double Bass,”
and then use the Left and Right
]
11
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a low-
Enter
pass filter frequency.
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:
The following low-pass filter frequen-
cies can be selected: 80 Hz (THX),
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, or 120 Hz.
Off(THX):The subwoofer only out-
puts the LFE channel.
On: In addition to LFE channel
sounds, the subwoofer out-
puts front left and right chan-
nel bass sounds.
Enter
Enter
Continue with step 11 in the next col-
umn.
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
12
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Distance
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select“Unit,”and then
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select:
]
4
5
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).
]
Enter
feet: Select if you want to enter
distances in feet. Can be set
from 0.2 to 30 feet in 0.2-foot
steps.
With the Speaker Distance settings, you can specify the
distance from each speaker to the listening position.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
1
meters: Select if you want to enter
distances in meters. Can be
set from 0.06 to 9 meters in
0.06-meter steps.
Enter
Receiver
The main menu appears onscreen.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a speaker, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to specify the distance.
Specify the distance from the speaker
to your listening position.
]
]
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
]
2
3
Notes:
Enter
• The Center distance cannot be set if
or Center is set to None in the
Speaker Configuration (page 101).
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
Enter
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
• The Surr Right and Surr Left dis-
tances cannot be set if Speaker Type
is set to BTL (page 47) or Surround
is set to None in the Speaker Config-
uration (page 101).
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
• The Surr Back R and Surr Back L
Type is set to Bi-Amp or BTL
(page 47), Surr Back is set to None in
the Speaker Configuration
buttons to select“3. Speaker Dis-
tance,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Distance screen appears.
Enter
2-3.Speaker Distance
(page 101), or Powered Zone 2 is
being used (page 126).
Unit
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
feet
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
• The Subwoofer distance cannot be
set if Subwoofer is set to No (step 4).
Enter
Repeat step 5 for each speaker.
6
7
Note:
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
• Speakers that you set to No or None
in the Speaker Configuration
(page 101) cannot be selected.
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Level Calibration
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a speaker, and
]
4
5
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB
for the subwoofer).
]
Enter
With the Level Calibration settings, you can adjust the
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listen-
ing position.
Repeat step 4 for each speaker
so that the volume of the test
tone from each speaker is the
same.
If you’re using a handheld sound level
meter, adjust the level of each speaker
so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listen-
ing position, measured with C-weight-
ing and slow reading.
Note:
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you nor-
mally listen at volume settings below this, be careful
because the test tone will be much louder.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
1
Receiver
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
6
The main menu appears onscreen.
Note:
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
]
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedi-
cated buttons on the remote controller. Press the [Test
Tone] button to output the test tone. Use the [CH Sel]
button to select each speaker, and use the [Level–] and
[Level+] buttons to adjust the level.
2
3
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
Enter
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select “4. Level Cali-
bration,” and then press [Enter].
The Level Calibration screen appears
and the pink noise test tone is output by
the front left speaker.
Enter
2-4.Level Calibration
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-15.0dB
Enter
Note:
• Levels cannot be adjusted for speak-
ers set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration (page 101).
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Equalizer Settings
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to set the “Equalizer”
option to:
Off: Equalizer off, flat response.
Manual:The equalizer for each
speaker can be set manually.
Audyssey: The equalizer for each
speaker is set automatically
by the Automatic Speaker
]
4
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).
Enter
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
speakers individually with a 15-band equalizer. The vol-
ume of each speaker can be set on page 105.
Setup function.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
If you selected Manual, continue with
the next step. If you selected Off or
Audyssey, go to step 8.
Receiver
Use the Down [ ] button to
select “Channel,” and then use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to select the speaker.
You can select: Front, Center, Sur-
round, Surr Back, or Subwoofer.
5
6
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
]
2
3
Enter
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
Enter
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select a frequency,
and use the Left and Right
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to cut or boost
that frequency.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
You can select: 25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz,
100 Hz, 160 Hz, 250 Hz, 400 Hz,
630 Hz, 1000 Hz, 1600 Hz, 2500 Hz,
4000 Hz, 6300 Hz, 10000 Hz, or
16000 Hz. And for the subwoofer,
25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz, 100 Hz, or
160 Hz.
buttons to select “5. Equalizer
Settings,” and then press [Enter].
The Equalizer Settings screen appears.
Enter
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] but-
tons move between the two screens.
2-5.Equalizer Settings
Enter
Equalizer
Channel
25Hz
Manual
Front
0dB
Each band can be cut or boosted from
–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps.
40Hz
0dB
63Hz
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
Tip: Low frequencies, such as 160 Hz,
affect bass sounds; high frequencies,
such as 6300 Hz, affect treble sounds.
100Hz
160Hz
250Hz
400Hz
0dB
2-5.Equalizer Settings
630Hz
1000Hz
1600Hz
2500Hz
4000Hz
6300Hz
10000Hz
16000Hz
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Use the Up [ ] button to select
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
]
7
2
“Channel” again, and use the
Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select another speaker.
Enter
Enter
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
Enter
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
4
buttons to select “6.THX Audio
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The THX Audio Setup screen appears.
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
8
Enter
2-6.THX Audio Setup
Surr Back Sp Spacing
THX Subwoofer
BGC
1ft-4ft
Yes
Off
Enter
Notes:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/
192 kHz input signals.
buttons to select “Surr Back Sp
Spacing,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to specify
the distance between your sur-
round back speakers:
Enter
THX Audio Setup
< 1 ft (< 0.3 m) (Default): Select this if
your surround back speakers are less
than 1 foot (30 cm) apart.
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-
matic Speaker Setup function (see page 55).
Enter
1–4 ft (0.3–1.2 m): Select this if your
surround back speakers are between 1
and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.
With the Surr Back Sp Spacing setting, you can specify
the distance between your surround back speakers.
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the THX
Subwoofer setting to Yes. You can then apply THX’s
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).
>4 ft (>1.2 m): Select this if your sur-
round back speakers are more than 4
Note:
• This setting is only available if the
Surr Back Ch setting in the Speaker
Configuration is set to 2ch
(page 102).
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
1
Receiver
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “THX Sub-
woofer,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if you do not have
a THX-certified subwoofer.
]
Press the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
5
2
3
Enter
Yes: Select this if you have a THX-
certified subwoofer.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
]
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Source Setup menu appears. The
name of the currently selected input
selector is displayed in a box.
Enter
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
6
buttons to select “BGC,” and use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to select:
Enter
Enter
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.
On: Select this to turn on BGC.
Note:
• This setting is only available if THX
Subwoofer is set to Yes (step 5).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [Enter].
]
4
5
Enter
Enter
The screen for that item appears.
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
7
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an option, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
The Source Setup menu items are
explained below.
]
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
]
Enter
Source Setup
Enter
This section explains items on the Source Setup menu.
Items can be set individually for each input selector.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, and then use the
1
Receiver
input selector buttons to select
an input source.
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
Phono
+10
Net/USB
0
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Name Edit
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Setup closes.
6
You can enter a custom name for each individual input
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When
selected, the custom name will appear on the display.
Select the input selector to which
1
you want to give a custom name.
To name a radio preset, use the [Tuner]
button to select AM or FM, and then
select the preset.
IntelliVolume
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your
source components is louder or quieter than the others.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
2
Receiver
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to set the level.
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use
the Left [ ] button to reduce its input level. If it’s
noticeably quieter, use the Right [ ] button to increase
its input level. The input level can be adjusted from
–12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
]
• IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3.
3
4
A/V Sync
Enter
The Source Setup menu appears.
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out
of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond
steps.
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to set the delay.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Name Edit,”
and then press [Enter].
]
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press
[Enter].
Enter
The Name Edit screen appears.
4-2.A/V Sync
DVD
4-3.Name Edit
DVD
A/V Sync
(HDMI LipSync
100msec
60msec)
Display
Name
Default
Press Enter to see picture
[
]
Enter
If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 114), and your
TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed
delay time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI
Lip Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parenthe-
ses.
If you’re naming an item for the very
first time, go to step 6.
If the item already has a name, you can
select Default or Custom in step 5.
Note:
• The A/V Sync function has no effect when the Direct
listening mode is used with an analog input source.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Display,” and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to select:
Default: The default name is dis-
played.
]
9
5
Enter
]
Custom:The custom name is dis-
played.
Enter
Notes:
• To store a name, you must select “OK” and press
[Enter] in step 7, otherwise it will not be saved.
When Default is selected, the station’s
frequency appears on the display when
a radio preset is selected.
• You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS
radio presets.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
tons.
Press the Down [ ] button to
select “Name,” and then press
[Enter] to open the character
input screen.
6
Enter
Satellite Radio
4-3.Name Edit
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available
if Satellite Radio is set to None (see page 114). See
Name
[
]
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Enter
Q
d
N O P
R S T U V W X Y Z
g
a
c
e
j
o m
b
f
h i
k
n o p q
u v w x y z
r s t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . ‘
SIRIUS Parental Lock
_
( ) +
= / , : ; ! ?
OK
*
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not
available if Satellite Radio is set to None or XM (see
page 114). See page 77 for more information.
Cancel
Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[
buttons to select a character, and
then press [Enter].
Repeat this step to enter up to 10
characters.
]
7
8
Enter
To correct a character:
1. Use the onscreen arrow
tons to select the incorrect charac-
ter.
2. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[
but-
Enter
]
buttons to select the correct charac-
ter, and then press [Enter].
When you’ve finished, use the
arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons
to display the following screen,
select “OK,” and then press
[Enter].
Enter
4-3.Name Edit
Name
[
]
Enter
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Q
d
N O P
R S T U V W X Y Z
g
a
c
e
j
o m
b
f
h i
k
n o p q
u v w x y z
r s t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . ‘
_
( ) +
= / , : ; ! ?
OK
*
Cancel
“OK”
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Miscellaneous Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
4
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
This section explains items on the Miscellaneous menu.
]
Enter
1
The items are explained below.
Ma
2
1
2
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Dimmer
Enter
+
Enter
Setup
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
5
Setup closes.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
1
2
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
Receiver
The main menu appears onscreen.
Volume Setup
■ Volume Display
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
is displayed.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select
]
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then
press [Enter].
Absolute: Display range is Min, 0.5 through 99.5,
Max.
Enter
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
Relative: Display range is –∞ dB, –81.5 dB,
–81.0 dB through +18.0 dB.
6.Miscellaneous
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value
0 dB.
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup
3.12V Trigger
4.12V Trigger
5.12V Trigger
Enter
A
B
C
Setup
Setup
Setup
■ Muting Level
This setting determines how much the output is muted
when the Muting function is used (see page 83). It can be
set to –∞ dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in
10 dB steps.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [Enter].
]
3
■ Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
Enter
The screen for that item appears.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
able this setting, select Off.
Enter
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
■ Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be each
OSD Setup
time the AV receiver is turned on.
■ Immediate Display
This setting determines whether operation details are
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV receiver
function is used.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
On: Displayed (default).
Off: Not displayed.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.
Even if On is selected, operation details are not output if
the input source is connected to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.
Note:
• The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher
than the Maximum Volume setting.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that
Immediate Display be turned off.
■ Headphone Level
With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume
relative to the main volume. This is useful if your head-
phones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you
usually use when listening through your speakers. The
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.
■ Monitor Type
With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your
TV so that menus are displayed properly.
4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3 (default).
16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9.
■ Zone2 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 2.
■ Display Position
This setting determines where on the screen operation
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
able this setting, select Off.
Top: Top of the screen.
■ TV Format
See “TV Format Setup (not NorthAmerican models)” on
page 60.
■ Zone2 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 2 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
■ Language
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
onscreen setup menus.You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.
12V Trigger A/B/C Setup
■ Zone3 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 3.
See “Using the 12V Triggers” on page 130.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
able this setting, select Off.
■ Zone3 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 3 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Hardware Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
4
5
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[
buttons to change it.
This section explains items on the Hardware menu.
]
Enter
The items are explained below.
Remote
indicator
On
Standby
TV
Input
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/DVR
CBL/SAT
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Number
buttons
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
Setup closes.
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
Note:
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
Receiver
Dimmer
+
Enter
Setup
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
Remote Control
-
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
■ Remote ID
When several Integra/Onkyo components are used in the
same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To dif-
ferentiate the AV receiver from the other components,
you can change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or
3. This setting changes the AV receiver’s remote ID.
Playlist
Random
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
Note:
1
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure
to change the remote controller to the same ID (see
below), otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with
the remote controller.
Receiver
The main menu appears onscreen.
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID
While holding down the
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,
press the TV [Input] button.
1
Receiver
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
3
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
The Remote indicator flashes four
times.
Enter
TV
Input
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
Enter
Use the number buttons to enter
ID 1, 2, or 3.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
2
6.Network
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
2
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [Enter].
]
Enter
The screen for that item appears.
Zone 2 and Zone 3
See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 124.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
■ Lip Sync
Tuner
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to
the complex digital video processing being performed by
your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV
receiver.
■ AM Freq Step (on some models)
See “AM Frequency Step Setup (on some models)” on
page 61.
■ Satellite Radio (on North American model)
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV receiver (both sold sep-
arately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respectively. If
you connect both types of antenna, select XM/SIRIUS.
Otherwise, select None. See the separate Satellite Radio
Guide for more information.
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled.
Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.
Notes:
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.
Analog Multich
• You can check the amount of delay being applied by
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen
(see page 109).
■ Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.
With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s sub-
woofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note that
this setting only affects signals connected to the AV
receiver’s MULTI CH SUBWOOFER jack.
■ xvYCC
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both
support the xvYCC color standard, you can enable
xvYCC color on the AV receiver with this setting.
Disable: xvYCC color disabled.
Enable: xvYCC color enabled.
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB
or 15 dB setting.
■ Control
This function allows CEC-compatible components or
RIHD-compatible components connected via HDMI to
be controlled with the AV receiver.
HDMI
Disable: HDMI Control disabled.
Enable: HDMI Control enabled.
■ HDMI Audio Out
This setting determines whether audio received by an
HDMI input is output by the HDMI outputs. You may
want to change this setting to On if your TV is connected
to an HDMI output and you want to listen to audio from
an HDMI component through your TV’s speakers. Nor-
mally, it should be set to Off.
Notes:
• HDMI control works only with the HDMI OUT
MAIN jack, not the HDMI OUT SUB jack.
• Select Disable if a connected component is incompat-
ible or you’re not sure about its compatibility.
• If operation is unreliable when set to Enable, select
Disable instead.
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default).
On: HDMI audio is output.
• When the HDMIAudio Out setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set-
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
Notes:
• If On is selected and the signal can be output by the
TV, the AV receiver will output no sound through its
speakers.
• When TV Control is enabled, this setting is set to
Auto.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be
output even if On is selected.
Power Control
• When the HDMIAudio Out setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set-
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
To link the power functions of CEC-compatible compo-
nents or RIHD-compatible components connected via
HDMI, select Enable.
Disable: Power Control disabled.
Enable: Power Control enabled.
Notes:
• The Power Control setting can be set only when the
above Control setting is set to Enable.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
• HDMI power control only works with HDMI-compat-
ible components that support it and may not work
properly with some components due to their settings
or compatibility.
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver consumes more
power.
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver enters Ready
mode when set to Standby, and the Ready indicator
lights up instead of the Standby indicator (not North
American model). Also, the AV receiver’s AC outlets
will be on all of the time regardless of whether the AV
receiver is set to On or Standby, or Ready mode in this
case.
TV Control
Select Enable to control the AV receiver from an RIHD-
compatible TV connected via HDMI.
Disable: TV Control disabled.
Enable: TV Control enabled.
Notes:
• Select Disable if your TV is incompatible or you’re
note sure about its compatibility.
• The TV Control setting can be set only when the above
Control and Power Control settings are both set to
Enable.
Note:
• After changing the Control, Power Control, or TV
Control setting, be sure to turn all of your compo-
nents off and then back on again. Refer to the
Network
See “Network Settings” on page 122.
Lock Setup
Lock
With this setting, you can protect your settings by lock-
ing the setup menus.
Locked: Setup menus locked.
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked.
When Locked is selected, only this Lock Setup item can
be accessed.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Net/USB
• WAV files must have a “.wav” or “.WAV” filename
extension.
About Net/USB
The AV receiver is network-ready, which means you can
hook it up to your home network with a standard Ether-
net cable and enjoy the music files stored on your com-
puter or media server. If your network is connected to the
Internet, you can also enjoy Internet radio.
Net/USB can also be used to play music files stored on
USB mass storage devices (e.g., USB flash drives and
MP3 players), which can be plugged into the AV
receiver’s front panel USB port.
■ M4A
M4A stands for MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and
bit rates of between 16 and 320 kbps are supported.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Variable bit rate (VBR) files are supported. (Playing
times may not display correctly.)
• M4A files must have a “.m4a” or “.M4A” filename
extension.
Internet Radio
USB Mass Storage Device Requirements
With Internet radio you can:
• Listen to Internet radio stations from around the
world.
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class.
• Playback may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
• Select stations by entering the appropriate URL with
the remote controller, or connect to the AV receiver
from your computer and enter the URL with your Web
browser.
• USB devices formatted with the FAT16 or FAT32 file
system are supported.
• Preset up to 20 Internet radio stations.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, only music
files in the first partition can be played.
Supported Audio File Formats
For server and USB mass storage device playback, the
AV receiver supports the following music file formats:
MP3, WMA, WAV, and M4A (MPEG-4 Audio).
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep.
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital out-
puts when playing music files.
■ MP3
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported.
• MP3 files must be MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 format
with a sampling rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz
and a bit rate of between 32 kbps and 320 kbps.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
Server Requirements
• Variable bit rate (VBR) MP3 files are supported.
(Playing times may not display correctly.)
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a
computer or media server and supports the following
technologies:
• MP3 files must have a “.mp3” or “.MP3” filename
extension.
®
• Windows Media Player 11
®
• Windows Media Connect 2.0
■ WMA
®
• UPnP AV-compatible media server
• DLNA-compatible media server
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an
®
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
®
®
Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by
Windows Media Player 11 and Windows Media Con-
nect 2.0 can be downloaded for free from the Microsoft
®
®
using Windows Media Player.
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
Web site.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz and bit
rates of between 48 kbps and 320 kbps, and lossless
DRM are supported. Incompatible files cannot be
played.
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV receiver.
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep. (The
actual number of files and folder levels depends on the
media server being used.)
• Variable bit rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times
may display incorrectly with VBR.)
• WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename
extension.
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital out-
puts when playing music files.
• In some cases, even if these requirements are met,
playback may not work properly due to the configura-
tion of the server.
■ WAV
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and
bit rates of 16 kbps are supported. Incompatible files
cannot be played.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Net/USB—Continued
Notes:
Minimum system requirements for Windows
Media Player 11 (for Windows XP)
®
®
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your
able to access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have
any problems with your Internet connection.
Operating system
Windows® XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows® XP Profes-
sional (SP2), Windows® XP Tablet PC Edition (SP2), Update
Rollup 2 for Windows® XP Media Center Edition 2005
(KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup for Windows®
XP Media Center Edition (KB925766)
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network
settings automatically. If you want to configure these
settings manually, see page 122.
Processor:
233 MHz Intel® Pentium ®II,
Advanced Micro Devices (AMD), etc.
64 MB
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so
if you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you
must use a PPPoE-compatible router.
Memory:
Hard disk:
Drive:
200 MB of free space
CD or DVD drive
28.8 kbps
16-bit sound card
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a
proxy server to use Internet radio. If your computer is
configured to use a proxy server, use the same settings
for the AV receiver (see page 122).
Modem:
Sound card:
Monitor:
Video card:
Software:
Super VGA (800 x 600)
64 MB VRAM, DirectX® 9.0b
Microsoft® ActiveSync® (only when
using a Windows Mobile®-based
Pocket PC or smartphone)
Connecting the AV Receiver
®
Web browser:
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6 or
To connect the AV receiver to your home network, plug
one end of a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable into the AV
receiver’s ETHERNET port, and plug the other end into
a LAN port on your router or switch.
Netscape 7.1
Network Requirements
The following diagram shows how you can connect the
AV receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s
connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port
100Base-TX switch built-in.
■ Ethernet Network
The AV receiver’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T. For
best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet network is
recommended. Although it’s possible to play music on a
computer that’s connected to the network wirelessly,
playback may be unreliable, so wired connections are
recommended.
DTR-8.8
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
B
C
REMOTE
CONTROL
CB/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
12V TRIGGER OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
SW
L
S
S
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENT
NTER SURR
S
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
PRE OUT
PHONO
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
SUR
■ Ethernet Router
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
ZONE2
L
Internet
radio
OUT
A router manages the network, routing data and supply-
ing IP addresses.Your router must support the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows sev-
eral networked computers to access the Internet simul-
taneously via a single Internet connection. The AV
receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.
ETHERNET
FRONT
R
(BTL)
Modem
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP addresses to network devices,
allowing them to configure themselves automatically.
WAN port
Router
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom-
mended.
LAN port
LAN port
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV receiver to your home network.
LAN/Ethernet port
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection
(e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory
results, so a broadband connection is strongly recom-
mended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please
consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
Computer or media server
The AV receiver’s NETWORK indicator lights up when
the AV receiver is connected to the network. It flashes if
a connection cannot be established.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Net/USB—Continued
Playing Music Files on a Server
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
6
buttons to select a music file,and
press the [Enter] or Play [ ] but-
ton to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
This section explains how to play music files on a com-
puter or media server through the AV receiver. See
page 116 for details on supported music servers and
music file formats.
Enter
Start your computer or media
server.
1
PLAY
My favorite Album
4/125
Artist name
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Net/USB] Input Selector button
My favorite song 1
2
Enter
00:10
04:35
WMA 160kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
Receiver
to select the Server screen.
RETURN
or
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [Return] button.
To stop playback, press the Stop [ ]
button.
Server
1/2
Server1: Shared1
server: MYPC
Net/USB
0
To select the next song, press the Next
[
] button. To select the beginning of
the current song, press the Previous
] button. To select the previous
[
Press the [Net/USB] Remote
Mode button to select the
Net/USB remote controller mode.
song, press the Previous [
twice.
] button
3
4
Net/USB
Random Playback
To play songs in random order, while playback is
stopped, press the [Random] button. All of the songs in
the current folder will be played in random order. When
all of the songs in the folder have been played once,
they’ll all be played again in a different random order. To
cancel random playback, stop playback or return to the
song list.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a server, and
then press [Enter].
]
Enter
A list of items on the server appears.
Server1: Shared1
1/10
Random playback supports up to 9,999 songs per folder.
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 9,999 are
not included in random playback.
Recently Added
Artists
Album
Songs
Genre
Enter
Year
Repeat Playback
Rating
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [Repeat] button
repeatedly to select: ONE, FOLDER, ALL, or Off.
In ONE mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In FOLDER mode, all of the songs in the current folder
are played repeatedly.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an item, and
then press [Enter].
]
5
Enter
A list of music files appears.
All Music
1/125
Song 1
Song 2
Song 3
My favorite song 1
My favorite song 2
My favorite song 3
My favorite song 4
My favorite song 5
My favorite song 6
My favorite song 7
In ALL mode, all of the songs on the current server are
played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [Repeat] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Enter
Note:
• If the message “No server” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this
case, check your server, network, and AV receiver
connections.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Net/USB—Continued
®
Windows Media Player 11 Setup
Playing Music Files on a USB Device
®
This section explains how to configureWindows Media
Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files
stored on your computer.
This section explains how to play music files on a USB
mass storage device. See page 116 for details on sup-
ported USB mass storage devices and music file formats.
®
1
Start Windows Media Player 11.
1
On the Library menu, select Media Shar-
ing.
2
The Media Sharing dialog box appears.
Select the Share my media check box,
and then click OK.
3
A list of supported devices appears.
4
Select the AV receiver in the list, and
then click Allow.
Tape
7
Tuner
8
9
4
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
Net/USB
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
5
Remote Mode
®
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
configuration.
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Dimmer
You can now play the music files in your Win-
®
dows Media Player 11 library through the AV
+
Enter
CH
receiver (see page 118).
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Note:
Display
Muting
®
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for
free from the Microsoft Web site.
®
aylist
Random
Plug your USB mass storage
device into the AV receiver’s USB
port.
1
2
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, and then press the
[Net/USB] Input Selector button
repeatedly to select the USB
screen.
Receiver
USB
USB Storage
1/1
Net/USB
0
USB indicator
The USB indicator lights up if the AV
receiver is able to read the USB mass
storage device. It flashes if it cannot
read it.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Net/USB—Continued
Random playback supports up to 9,999 songs per folder.
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 9,999 are
not included in random playback.
Press the [Net/USB] Remote
Mode button to select the
Net/USB remote controller mode.
3
4
Net/USB
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [Repeat] button
repeatedly to select: ONE, FOLDER, ALL, or Off.
In ONE mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In FOLDER mode, all of the songs in the current folder
are played repeatedly.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a USB mass
storage device, and then press
[Enter].
A list of the device’s contents appears.
]
Enter
USB Storage
1/15
In ALL mode, all of the songs on the USB mass storage
device (in the same partition) are played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [Repeat] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Folder1
Folder2
Enter
01_Song_Track1.WMA
02_Song_Track2.WMA
03_Song_Track3.WMA
04_Song_Track4.WMA
05_Song_Track5.WMA
06_Song_Track6.WMA
07_Song_Track7.WMA
08_Song_Track8.WMA
Notes:
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV
receiver’s USB port, we recommend that you use its
AC adapter to power it.
To open a folder, use the Up and Down
]/[ ] buttons to select it, and then
press [Enter].
[
• The operation of hard disk drives that draw their
power from the AV receiver’s USB port cannot be
guaranteed.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
5
buttons to select a music file,and
press the [Enter] or Play [ ] but-
ton to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
• Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB
port on your computer. Music on your computer can-
not be played through the AV receiver in this way.
Enter
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that sup-
port the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which
allows USB storage devices to be connected to com-
puters without the need for special drivers or software.
Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB
Mass Storage Class standard. Refer your USB MP3
player’s instruction manual for details.
PLAY
4/15
USB Storage
02_Song_Track2.WMA
--:--:--
00:10
Enter
WMA 160kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
RETURN
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot
be played.
or
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [Return] button.
To stop or pause playback, press the
Stop [ ] or Pause [ ] button, respec-
tively.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the
loss or damage to data stored on a USB mass storage
device when that device is used with the AV receiver.
We recommend that you back up your important
music files beforehand.
To select the next song, press the Next
[
] button. To select the beginning of
the current song, press the Previous
] button. To select the previous
• When you connect a USB MP3 player to the AV
receiver, what’s shown on the AV receiver’s display
may not match what’s shown on the MP3 player’s dis-
play. Also, song management functions used by some
MP3 players, such as song genre, sort, additional
information, etc., cannot be used with the AV receiver.
[
song, press the Previous [
twice.
] button
Random Playback
• Operation with all USB mass storage devices includ-
ing the ability to power them is not guaranteed.
To play songs in random order, while playback is
stopped, press the [Random] button. All of the songs in
the current folder will be played in random order. When
all of the songs in the folder have been played once,
they’ll all be played again in a different random order. To
cancel random playback, stop playback or return to the
song list.
• Do not connect your USB mass storage device via a
USB hub. The USB mass storage device must be con-
nected directly to the AV receiver’s USB port.
• If the USB mass storage device contains a lot of data,
the AV receiver make take a while to read it.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Net/USB—Continued
• Song ID information, such as album name, artist, etc.,
cannot be displayed on the AV receiver.
Press the [Net/USB] Remote
Mode button to select the
Net/USB remote controller mode.
2
3
• The total playing time cannot be displayed on the AV
receiver.
Net/USB
• Playback from a memory card that’s inserted in a USB
card reader may not work properly.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
• Depending on the USB mass storage device, issues
such as not being able to read the device’s contents
properly, and not being able to supply power properly
may occur.
buttons to select an empty item,
and then press the [Setup] but-
ton.
Enter
The URL Input screen appears.
Listening to Internet Radio
To receive Internet radio, you must connect the AV
receiver to a network with Internet access (see
page 117).
You can select Internet radio stations by entering the
appropriate URL with the remote controller, or by con-
necting to the AV receiver from your computer and
entering the URL with your Web browser.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are sup-
ported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used by
the Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to
some stations.
Use the remote controller to
enter the URL of the Internet
radio station you want to listen
to.
Use the same method as for the Name
Edit function on page 109 to enter a
URL.
When you’ve finished, select
“OK,” and then press [Enter].
To update the station list, press
the [Return] button.
4
AUX 1
5
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
The station appears in the list.
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
Net/USB
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
OR:
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
On your computer, start your
Web browser and enter the AV
receiver’s IP address in the
browser’s Internet address (URL)
field.
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Dimmer
+
Enter
Setup
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
The browser connects to the AV
receiver and displays the same screen
as the AV receiver.
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
URL with your browser.
ylist
Random
Notes:
• The AV receiver’s IP address is
shown on the Network screen (see
page 122).
Press the [Net/USB] Input Selec-
tor button repeatedly to select
the Internet Radio screen.
1
Net/USB
• If you’re using DHCP, your router
may not always allocate the same IP
address to the AV receiver, so if you
find that you can’t connect to the AV
receiver, recheck the AV receiver’s
IP address on Network screen.
0
Internet Radio
1/20
<no item>
<no item>
<no item>
<no item>
<no item>
<no item>
<no item>
<no item>
<no item>
<no item>
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Net/USB—Continued
Network Settings
Press [Enter].
The station’s programs are displayed.
5
This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s
network settings manually.
Enter
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need
to change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default
(i.e., DHCP is set to Enable). If, however, your router’s
DHCP server is disabled, for example, you’re using
static IP addresses, you’ll need to configure these set-
tings yourself, in which case, a knowledge of Ethernet
networking is essential.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select a program, and
then press [Enter].
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
]
6
Enter
What’s DHCP?
PLAY
1/45
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices
to automatically configure themselves on a network.
Enter
iRadio station name
Streaming program name
--:--:--
01:29
MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
What’s DNS?
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses
DNS to translate this into an IP address, in this case
63.148.251.142.
RETURN
Once you’ve added a station to the list, simply select it
on the Internet Radio screen, and then press [Enter] to
start playback.
Notes:
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
• When connected to an Internet radio station that uses
the MP3 streaming format, the MP3 indicator lights
up. When connected to an Internet radio station that
uses the WMA streaming format, the WMA indicator
lights up.
1
Receiver
• If you’re using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,
56K modem or ISDN), depending on the station,
Internet radio may not work satisfactorily. For best
results, use a broadband connection (e.g., cable
modem, xDSL modem, etc).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
Enter
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
Enter
6.Network
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Net/USB—Continued
Disable: Control over the network disabled.
■ Port
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select “6. Network,”
and then press [Enter].
3
This is the network port used for control over the net-
Enter
work.
The Network screen appears.
7-6.Network
DHCP
MAC Adress
Control
Port
00:00:00-00:00:00
Disable
---
This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.
Enable: DHCP enabled.
Enter
Disable: DHCP disabled.
If you select Disable, you must configure the IPAddress,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings your-
self.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select the settings,
and use the Left and Right
]
4
5
Enter
IP Address
[
]/[ ] buttons to set them.
To enter an IP address, select the set-
ting, and then press [Enter]. The arrow
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
an IP address. Enter a static IP address provided by your
ISP.
The IP address must be within the following ranges.
Class A: 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
Class B: 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
Class C: 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
[
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons can then be
used to enter numbers. Press [Enter]
again to set the number.
The settings are explained below.
When you’ve finished, use the Up
and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select “Save Settings,” and then
press [Enter].
Enter
Subnet Mask
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
a subnet mask address.
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically: 255.255.255.0).
7-6.Network
Proxy
Proxy URL
Enable
8080
Enter
Proxy Port
Save Settings
Gateway
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
a gateway address.
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
6
Setup closes.
DNS Server
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify
a DNS server.
Enter the DNS server addresses provided by your ISP.
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
Proxy URL
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
Proxy Port
Mac Address
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number
here.
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)
address. This address cannot be changed.
Control
This setting enables or disables control over the network.
Enable: Control over the network enabled.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.
ConnectingYour Zone 2 Speakers to an
Amp in Zone 2
Connecting Zone 2
There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers:
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main lis-
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2,
2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2.
with a different source in each room.
Hookup
ConnectingYour Zone 2 Speakers Directly
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
to the AV receiver
This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main
room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a
different source in each room. This is called Powered
Zone 2, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV
receiver. Note that when Powered Zone 2 is turned off,
you can enjoy 7.1-channel playback in your main room.
on your Zone 2 amp.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on a
powered subwoofer in Zone 2.
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker termi-
nals on your Zone 2 amp.
Hookup
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals.
Main room
Main room
TV
TV
AV receiver
AV receiver
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
2
IN
3
IN
2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
B
C
REMOTE
CONTROL
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
12V TRIGGER OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
SW
S
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
O
I
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
F
R
O
N
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
URR SURR BACK FRNT CNTER SURR
S
U
R
R
B
A
C
K
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOFER
CENTER
CD
T
APE
AUX
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHON
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ZONE2
L
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ANTENNA
FRONT
R
(BTL)
FRONT
L
(BTL)
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
2
IN
3
IN
2
IN 1(DVD)
1
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
B
C
REMOTE
CONTROL
CB/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
12V TRIGGER OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
DVD)
CR/PR
SW
L
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
F
R
O
N
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
S
U
R
R
B
A
C
K
SW
L
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
CR/DVR)
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ZONE2
L
OUT
FRONT
R
(BTL)
FRONT
L
(BTL)
R
ZONE2 R
ZONE2 L
PRE OUT
Zone 2
Zone 2
LINE INPUT
R
L
IN
R
L
Powered
subwoofer
Receiver/
integrated amp
You must set the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act
(Activated) to use this setup (see page 126).
Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be
set on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no vol-
ume control, set the Zone 2 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver
(see page 127).
Note:
• With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the
AV receiver.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Zone 2 Video Outputs
Connecting Zone 3
The AV receiver features a composite video output and
component video output for connection to a TV in Zone 2,
so you can enjoy both audio and video in that zone.
Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.
ConnectingYour Zone 3 Speakers
Hookup
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and a
different source to those selected for your main room and
Zone 2.
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV
receiver’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video
input on your Zone 2 TV.
Hookup
• Alternatively, use a component video cable to connect
the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT jacks to a component video input
on your Zone 2 TV.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
on your Zone 3 amp.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 3 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on a pow-
ered subwoofer in Zone 3.
Main room
TV
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker terminals
on your Zone 3 amp.
Main room
AV receiver
TV
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
2
IN
3
IN
2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
B
C
REMOTE
CONTROL
CB/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
12V TRIGGER OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
SW
L
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
F
R
O
N
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
S
U
R
R
B
A
C
K
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
T
APE
AUX
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
ZONE2
L
OUT
FRONT
R
(BTL)
FRONT
L
(BTL)
MONITOR OUT
2
ZONE 2
OUT
/ZONE
2
OUT
AV receiver
or
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ANTENNA
ETHERNET
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
2
IN
3
IN
2
IN 1(DVD)
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
B
C
REMOTE
CONTROL
CB/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
12V TRIGGER OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
CR/PR
SW
L
S
S
O
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
F
R
O
N
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
S
U
R
R
B
A
C
K
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
T
APE
AUX
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ONE2
L
OUT
FRONT
R
(BTL)
FRONT
L
(BTL)
ZONE 3
SW
L
Zone 2
TV
R
PRE OUT
• If you use the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, you must set the Monitor Out2
setting to Zone 2 (see page 48).
Zone 3
LINE INPUT
Notes:
IN
Powered
subwoofer
• The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from compo-
nents connected to composite video inputs and S-Video
inputs.
R
L
Receiver/
integrated amp
• The COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs video from components
connected to component video inputs.
Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be
set on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no vol-
ume control, set the Zone 3 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver
(see page 127).
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Powered Zone 2 Setting
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/
Zone 3,” and then press [Enter].
]
3
4
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 speakers to the AV
receiver, as explained in “ConnectingYour Zone 2 Speak-
ers Directly to theAV receiver” on page 124, you must set
the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act (Activated).
Enter
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.
7-2.Zone2/Zone3
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Not Act
Fixed
Zone3 Out
Fixed
Enter
On
Standby
TV
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “Powered
Zone 2,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
NotAct: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
nals not activated (Powered
Zone 2 disabled).
]
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Enter
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Dimmer
Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
nals activated (Powered Zone
2 enabled).
+
Enter
Enter
Setup
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
5
aylist
Random
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
1
2
Notes:
Receiver
• When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned on, the Zone 2
speakers connected to the ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
nals output sound, but the surround back speakers con-
nected to the SURR BACK L/R speaker terminals do
not. When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned off, the
surround back speakers output sound as normal.
The main menu appears onscreen.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
Enter
Enter
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
5
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to
an amp with no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out or
Zone 3 Out setting, respectively, to Variable so that you
can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the AV
receiver.
Note:
Press the [Receiver] Remote
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-
tons.
1
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Receiver
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3
This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.
Zone 2
Zone 3
Tone
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
2
3
4
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
Enter
Enter
,
Off
Level
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/
]
Standby
On
On
Standby
TV
Zone 3,” and then press [Enter].
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.
Input
Enter
DVD
1
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
+
TV CH
-
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
Input
4
7-2.Zone2/Zone3
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
Selector
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Not Act
Fixed
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
Zone3 Out
Fixed
11
12
Input Selector
Enter
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Zone3
Zone2
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
buttons to select“Zone 2 Out”or
“Zone 3 Out,” and use the Left
and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select:
Fixed: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume
must be set on the amp in that
zone.
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
Enter
-
Prev
CH
Muting
Display
Muting
Playlist
Rec
Random
Variable: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 vol-
ume can be set on the AV
receiver.
Enter
Listening Mode
Surround
Stereo
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
Level–,
Level+
L
Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-688M
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
• On the North American model, you can select a differ-
ent radio source for each room. For example, XM for
your main room, SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for
Zone 3.
Selecting an Input Source for Zones
On the remote controller, press
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote
Mode button.
1
Remote
controller
The [Zone2] or [Zone3] Remote Mode
button lights up.
Zone
3
2
Turning Off Zones
Zone
On the remote controller, press
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote
Mode button.
The [Zone2] or [Zone3] Remote Mode
On the AV receiver, press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator flashes,
and the input selector currently selected
for the zone appears on the display.
1
AV receiver
Remote
controller
Zone
3
2
button lights up.
Zone
On the AV receiver, press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator flashes.
AV receiver
On the remote controller, use the
Input Selector buttons.
2
Remote
The input source is selected, the zone is
turned on, and the Zone 2 or Zone 3
indicator lights continuously.
controller
DVD
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
1
Game
4
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
/
TV
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
On the AV receiver, use the input
selector buttons, or press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button
repeatedly
The input source is selected, the zone is
turned on, the name of the input selec-
tor appears on the display, and the Zone
2 or Zone 3 indicator lights continu-
ously.
On the remote controller, press
the [Standby] button.
2
Phono
+10
Net/USB
0
Remote
controller
Standby
On the AV receiver, press the
[Off] button.
AV receiver
The zone is turned off, and the Zone 2
or Zone 3 indicator goes off.
AV receiver
Notes:
• To select AM or FM, press the [Tuner] input selector
button repeatedly. On the North American model, you
can also select XM or SIRIUS.
• Only analog input sources are output by Zone 2 and
Zone 3. Digital input sources are not output. If no
sound is heard when an input source is selected, check
to make sure it’s connected to an analog input.
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, listening modes
that require surround back speakers (6.1/7.1), such as
Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, and THX Ultra2 Cinema,
are unavailable.
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/
Standby and Direct Change
work.
functions do not
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Adjusting the Volume of Zones
Muting Zones
Remote
controller
On the remote controller, press
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote
Mode button, and then use the
[Level–] and [Level+] buttons.
On the remote controller, press
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote
Mode button, and then press the
[Muting] button.
Zone
3
2
Zone
3
2
Zone
Zone
On the AV receiver, press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button, and
then use the Level Up and Down
To unmute a zone, on the remote
controller, press the [Zone 2] or
[Zone 3] Remote Mode button,
and then press the [Muting] but-
ton again.
Level
-
Level+
Muting
[
]/[ ] buttons.
AV receiver
Adjusting the Tone of Zone 2
On the AV receiver, press the
[Zone 2] button.
1
AV receiver
Press the AV receiver’s [Tone]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble.
2
3
Adjusting the Balance of Zones
On the AV receiver, press the
1
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.
AV receiver
Use the Tone Plus [+] and Minus
[–] buttons to adjust the bass or
treble.
You can boost or cut the Bass or Treble
from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
Press the AV receiver’s [Tone]
button repeatedly to select Bal-
ance.
2
3
Use the Tone Plus [+] and Minus
[–] buttons to adjust the balance.
You can adjust the balance from 0 in the
center to +10 dB to the right or +10 dB
to the left in 2 dB steps.
Notes:
• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the Zone 2 Out
setting is set to Fixed (page 127).
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the Zone 3 Out set-
ting is set to Fixed (page 127).
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Using the 12V Triggers
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
3
buttons to select “12V Trigger A,
B, or C,” and then press [Enter].
The 12V Trigger A/B/C Setup screen
appears.
The 12V triggersA, B, and C can be used to turn on 12V
trigger-capable components automatically when they are
selected as the input source. The triggers can be set so
that they activate when a connected component is
selected as the input source for the main room, Zone 2,
Zone 3, or any combination of rooms.
Enter
6-x.12V Trigger x Setup
Delay
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
TV/GAME
AUX1
AUX2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
NET/USB
1sec
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
When triggered, the output from a 12V TRIGGER OUT
goes high (+12 volts, 100 milliamperes max).
Enter
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
A
B
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
AC INLET
OUT
OUT
SUB
RS232
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
MAIN
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
/ZONE OUT
2
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN IN 1(DVD)
ASSIGNABLE
MONITOR
OUT
AM
FM75
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
IR
V
V
B
C
REMOTE
C
C
B/PB
ZONE
OUT
2
CONTROL
12V TRIGGER OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
IN
1
(DVD)
R/PR
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
]
SW
L
S
S
OUT
A
B
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT CENTER
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
VCR/DVR)
4
5
IN
IN
IN
IN
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
buttons to select“Delay,”and use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to select: 0 sec, 1 sec, 2 sec,
or 3 sec.
When 0 sec is selected, the trigger sig-
nal is output as soon as the input source
is changed.
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CD
TAPE
AUX
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
T
VCR/DVR
SURR
DVD
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
FRONT
PRE OUT
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
(CD)
GND
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
R
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
L
ZONE2
R
FRONT
R
R
SURR
L
L
ZONE2
L
OUT
FRONT
R
(BTL)
FRONT
L
(BTL)
Enter
Hookup
• Use a miniplug cable to connect the AV receiver’s 12V
TRIGGER OUT A, B, or C jack to the 12 V trigger
input on a connected component.
Enter
When several components are turned on simultaneously
by using triggers A, B, and C, depending on the type of
components, a large amount of current may be drawn
momentarily. To prevent this, you can delay trigger sig-
nals A, B, and C individually. Another application for
trigger delay is eliminating the “thump” noise that’s
sometimes heard when a source component is turned on.
Delaying the trigger signal for your power amplifier so
that it’s the last component to be turned on will accom-
plish this.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select an input source,
and use the Left and Right
]
Enter
[
]/[ ] buttons to select an
option.
Off: No trigger signal is output.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
1
A 12-volt trigger signal is output when
the connected component is selected as
the source for:
Receiver
[Setup] button.
Enter
The main menu appears onscreen.
Main: Main room.
Zone2: Zone 2.
Main/Z2: Main room or Zone 2.
Zone3: Zone 3.
Main/Z3: Main room or Zone 3.
Z2/Z3: Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Main/Z2/Z3: Main room, Zone 2, or
Zone 3.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[
buttons to select
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then
press [Enter].
]
2
Enter
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
6
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
Setup closes.
6.Miscellaneous
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup
3.12V Trigger
4.12V Trigger
5.12V Trigger
Enter
A
B
C
Setup
Setup
Setup
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
Using the Remote Controller in
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV
receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-
cially available multiroom remote control kit for each
zone.
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
IR Receiver
Connecting
block
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line
of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when
it’s installed inside a cabinet.
IR IN
A or B
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the
connecting block.
Inside
cabinet
Remote controller
Signal flow
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components
IR IN
A or B
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN A or B jack are fed
through to the other component via the IR emitter. Sig-
nals picked up by the AV receiver’s remote control sen-
sor are not output.
IR Receiver
Connecting
block
Remote controller
IR Receiver
Connecting
Main room
Zone 2/3
block
Signal flow
IR IN
A or B
AV receiver
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be
connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN A or B jack, as
shown below. The IR IN A and B jacks are identical. Up
to two IR receivers can be connected.
IR OUT
IR Emitter
Remote controller
Other component
From the connecting block
Miniplug cable
Signal flow
IR
A
B
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s
IR OUT jack, as shown below.
IN
OUT
AV receiver
Miniplug cable
Other component
Remote control
sensor
Emitter
IR
A
B
IN
Miniplug
IR Emitter
OUT
AV receiver
Signal flow
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
You can control your other components, including those
This section explains how to:
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.
While holding down the Remote
Mode button to which you want
to enter the code, press the
[Standby] button.
2
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD/Dock
The Remote indicator lights up.
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
• Learn commands directly from another component’s
remote controller (see page 135).
• Program the Macro buttons to perform a sequence of
up to eight remote control actions (see page 136).
Standby
Entering Remote Control Codes
To control another component, you must first enter that
component’s remote control code to a Remote Mode but-
ton. You’ll need to enter a code for each component that
you want to control.
Within 30 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the 4-digit
remote control code.
3
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
AUX 2
6
Game
4
/TV
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
Remote
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
8
indicator
Standby
On
Standby
Net/USB
0
TV
Input
TV
I
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
Number
buttons
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
Press the Remote Mode button
again to select the remote con-
troller mode, point the remote
controller at the component, and
check the operation.
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
4
11
12
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
Remote
Mode
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Dimmer
If the remote controller doesn’t work as
expected, and several remote codes are
listed, try each one in turn and use the
one that works best.
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
Prev
CH
Display
Muting
Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the
[Receiver], [Zone 2], [Zone 3], and [Net/USB]
Remote Mode buttons.
Playlist
Rec
Random
Listening Mode
Surround
• The remote control codes provided are correct at the
time of printing but subject to change.
Stereo
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
• The [DVD] and [CD] Remote Mode buttons are
preprogrammed for use with Integra/Onkyo DVD
players and CD players, respectively.
L
Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
VCR
RC-688M
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder or
MD recorder, enter the appropriate remote control
code to the [CD] Remote Mode button.
Look up the component’s remote
control code in the separate
Remote Control Codes list.
1
The codes are organized by category.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Note:
• If you connect an
Remote Control Codes for Integra/Onkyo
Components Connected via
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc or CD
recorder to the TAPE IN/OUT jacks, for remote oper-
ation to work properly, you must set the Input Display
to MD or CDR, respectively (see page 52).
Integra/Onkyo components that are connected via
are controlled by pointing the remote controller at the
AV receiver, not the component. This allows you to con-
trol components that are out of view, in a rack, for exam-
ple.
Resetting the Remote Mode Buttons
You can reset a Remote Mode button to its default
remote control code.
Make sure the Integra/Onkyo component
1
is connected with an
cable and an
While holding down the Remote
Mode button that you want to
analog audio cable (RCA).
See page 45 for details.
1
Remote Mode
reset, press the TV [
] button.
DVD
VCR
The Remote indicator flashes three
times.
CD
TV
Enter the appropriate remote control code
to the Remote Mode button.
2
CDR/MD/Dock
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
• [DVD] Remote Mode button
5002: Integra/Onkyo DVD player with
TV
• [CD] Remote Mode button
6002: Integra/Onkyo CD player with
• [MD] Remote Mode button
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with
Press the Remote Mode button
again.
2
• [CDR] Remote Mode button
Remote Mode
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the button has been
reset.
DVD
VCR
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with
CD
TV
• [Dock] Remote Mode button
CDR/MD/Dock
6004: Onkyo RI Dock DS-A1 with
See the previous page for how to enter remote
control codes.
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
The [DVD] and [CD] Remote Mode
buttons are preprogrammed with
remote control codes for controlling
Integra/Onkyo DVD players and CD
players, respectively. When these but-
tons are reset, the preprogrammed
codes are restored.
Press the Remote Mode button, point the
remote controller at the AV receiver, and
operate the component.
3
If you want to control an Integra/Onkyo component by
pointing the remote controller directly at it, or you want
to control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s not con-
Resetting the Remote Controller
nected via
, use the following remote control codes:
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.
• [DVD] Remote Mode button
While holding down the
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,
press the [Standby] button.
The Remote indicator flashes five
times.
5001: Integra/Onkyo DVD player without
1
(default)
Receiver
• [CD] Remote Mode button
6001: Integra/Onkyo CD player without
(default)
Standby
• [MD] Remote Mode button
6007: Onkyo MD recorder without
• [CDR] Remote Mode button
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
2
• [Dock] Remote Mode button
Receiver
6003: Onkyo RI Dock DS-A2 without
(default)
indicating that the remote controller
has been reset.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select
the appropriate remote controller mode with the Remote Mode buttons first.) With some components, certain buttons
may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.
■ Controlling a TV
■ Controlling a VCR
■ Controlling a Satellite or
Cable Receiver
Press [VCR] first
Press [Cable] (SAT) first
Press [TV] first
On
Standby
On
Standby
On
Standby
TV
TV
A
2
TV
Input
Input
Input
A
2
5
3
A
2
DVD
1
VCR
/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
DVD
1
VCR
/DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
1
VCR
/DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX
5
3
+
TV CH
-
2
AUX
5
3
+
TV CH
-
2
AUX
5
3
+
TV CH
-
1
AUX
6
2
1
AUX
6
2
Game
/
TV
Game/TV
1
AUX
6
2
Game/
TV
4
4
4
Tape
7
Tuner
CD
9
Tape
7
CD
9
Tuner
Tape
7
Tuner
CD
9
8
Net/USB
0
8
Net/USB
0
8
Net/USB
0
TV VOL
TV VOL
Phono
D.TUN
Phono
+10
/
D.TUN
TV VOL
Phono
D.TUN
6
+10
Clear
Clear
+10
Clear
11
12
11
12
--
/
--- 10
-- --- 10
11
12
--
/
--- 10
Input Selector
Input Selector
Input Selector
Macro
Macro
Macro
3
3
Zone
3
2
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
Remote Mode
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
CDR/MD/Dock
CDR/MD/Dock
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
TV
Cable
SAT
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Net/USB
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Dimmer
Dimmer
8
8
3
8
9
8
4
9
4
+
+
+
CH
CH
CH
Enter
VOL
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
Disc
Album
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
-
-
8
7
Prev
CH
Prev
CH
8
6
9
9
Prev
CH
4
8
Display
Muting
5
8
Display
Muting
5
6
Display
Muting
Playlist
Playlist
Rec
Random
8
Rec
Random
Playlist
Rec
Random
7
Listening Mode
Surround
Listening Mode
Surround
Listening Mode
Surround
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
Repeat
Audio
Direct
Subtitle
THX
Play Mode
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level
-
Level+
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
Open/Close Video Off
Audio Sel
L
Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
L
Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
L
Night
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
7
VCR
VCR
VCR
RC-688M
RC-688M
RC-688M
A [On], [Standby]
A [On], [Standby]
A [On], [Standby],TV [
]*
Set the satellite/cable receiver to
Set the VCR to On or Standby.
Set the TV to On or Standby.
On or Standby.
B Number buttons
B Number buttons
B Number buttons
Enter numbers.
Enter numbers.
Enter numbers.
C [Clear]
C [CH +/–],TV CH [+]/[–]*
C [Clear]
Cancels functions.
Select channels on the TV.
Cancels functions.
D [CH +/–]
D [Prev CH]
D [CH +/–]
Selects channels on the VCR.
Selects the previous channel.
Selects satellite/cable channels.
E [Prev CH]
E [TV Input]*
E [Prev CH]
Selects the previous channel.
Selects the TV’s external inputs.
Selects the previous channel.
F Rec [
]
F TV VOL [ ]/[ ]*
F [Guide]
Starts recording.
Adjust the TV’s volume.
Displays the program guide.
G Eject [
]
G [Muting]
G [ ], [
]
Ejects the videocassette.
Mutes the TV.
Rewind and Fast forward.
H [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
]
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Menu]/
[Enter]/[Return]
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Menu]/
[Enter]/[Return]
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and
Fast forward.
Navigate menus on the TV.
Navigate menus on the satel-
lite/cable receiver.
I [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Menu]/
[Enter]/[Return]
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*)
are exclusively for controlling a TV
and can be used at any time, regard-
less of the currently selected remote
controller mode.
Navigate menus on the VCR.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Learning Commands
Point the remote controllers at
each other, about 2 to 6 inches
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press
and hold the button whose com-
mand you want to learn until the
Remote indicator flashes.
3
The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the com-
mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
then transmit the exact same command when its Play
If the command is learned successfully,
the Remote indicator flashes twice.
[
] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate
remote control code (page 132) but some buttons don’t
work as expected.
V O L U M E
M U T
T O N E
T E S T
C H S E L
C
P R E T
T U N E R
D V D
T
I N P U T
M U L T I - C H
P H O N O
C T O R
G R O U P
R
M O D E
S U
D I S C
T U N E R
C
D
E R
V I D E O - 2
About 2 to 6
I N P U T L E
T P E
D I M M
V I D E O - 1
Remote
indicator
S L E E P
D V
inches (5–15 cm)
P O W E R
On
Standby
O
n
TV
D
V
S
t
D
a
1
n
d
G
a
Input
n
b
e
y
/T
D
C
4
1
V
R
T
/
a
D
p
V
2
e
R
7
AUX1
I
Phono
C
+
5
B
T
10
T
L
V
In
-
-
/
u
S
A
/
-
n
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL
/
SAT
3
e
T
-
r
A
U
X
-
Net/USB 8
1
0
p
u
1
2
t
Input
6
Selector0
C
D
DVD
+
T
Macro
9
V
1
D.TUN
+
TV CH
-
C
2
AUX 1
5
3
1
H
2
Clear
R
VCR
emo
T
V
1
2
te
M
V
O
L
Cable
3
AUX 2
6
Game
/
TV
ode
SAT
CDR/MD/Dock
CD
Z
Net/USB
o
n
e
3
4
Z
o
n
e
2
Receiver
Tape/AM
RC-688M
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
Sleep
P
TV VOL
Phono
+10
Net/USB
D.TUN
Clear
0
To learn more commands, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
Press any Remote Mode button when
you’ve finished.
-- --- 10
11
12
/
4
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
1, 4
TV
Cable
SAT
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Net/USB
Dimmer
Notes:
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
Remote Mode, Macro [1], [2], [3], TV [Input], TV CH
[+]/[–], TV VOL [ ]/[ ], [D.TUN], Light.
+
CH
Enter
VOL
Disc
Album
-
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to
90 commands, although this will be less if commands
that use a lot of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,
controlling Integra/Onkyo CD players, cassette decks,
and DVD players. However, they can learn new com-
mands, and you can restore the preprogrammed com-
mands at any time by resetting the remote controller
(see page 133).
While holding down the Remote
Mode button for the mode in
which you want to use the com-
mand, press the [On] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.
1
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD/Dock
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat
this procedure.
Receiver
Tape/AMP
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can
be learned.
On
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.
Press the button you want to
learn the new command.
2
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Using Macros
Press the buttons whose actions
you want to program into the
macro in the order you want them
performed.
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press the following buttons:
[ON], [CD] Input Selector, [CD]
Remote Mode, Play [ ].
2
You can program the remote controller’s Macro buttons
to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the follow-
ing actions:
1. Press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button to select
the Receiver remote controller mode.
2. Press the [On] button to turn on the AV receiver.
3. Press the [CD] Input Selector button to select the
CD input source.
4. Press the [CD] Remote Mode button to select the
CD remote controller mode.
5. Press the Play [ ] button to start playback on the
When you’ve finished, press the
Macro button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
If you enter eight commands, the pro-
cess will finish automatically.
3
Macro
2
1
3
CD player.
Note:
• If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are
taught new commands, the macro will no longer work
properly and will have to be made again.
You can program a Macro button so that all five actions
are performed with just one button press.
Making Macros
Running Macros
Each Macro button can store one macro, and each macro
can contain up to eight commands.
Press the Macro [1], [2], or [3]
button.
Macro
1
2
3
Remote
The commands in the macro are trans-
mitted in the order in which they were
programmed. Keep the remote control-
ler pointed at the AV receiver until all
of the commands have been transmit-
ted.
indicator
On
Standby
TV
Input
DVD
1
VCR
/
DVR
CBL/SAT
2
AUX 1
5
3
+
TV CH
-
AUX 2
6
Game/TV
4
Tape
7
Tuner
8
CD
9
TV VOL
Phono
Net/USB
D.TUN
Macros can be run at any time, regard-
less of the current remote controller
mode.
+10
-- --- 10
/
Clear
0
11
12
Macro
1, 2, 3
Input Selector
Macro
Zone
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
Zone
CDR/MD/Dock
Remote
Mode
TV
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Receiver
Dimmer
Deleting Macros
While holding down the
1
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,
press the Macro button whose
macro you want to delete.
While holding down the Remote
Mode button of the remote con-
troller mode you want to use at
the start of the macro, press
Macro button [1], [2], or [3].
The Remote indicator lights up.
Receiver
1
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
Macro
2
CDR/MD/Dock
1
3
Cable
SAT
Net/USB
Receiver
Tape/AMP
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press and hold the [Receiver]
Remote Mode button, and then press
Macro button [1], [2], or [3].
Press the Macro button again.
2
Macro
1
2
3
Macro
2
1
3
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact the dealer from whom you purchased
this unit.
press the remote controller’s [Muting] button to
unmute the AV receiver (page 83).
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the Phones
jack, no sound is output by the main room speakers
(page 84).
• Check the digital audio output settings on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 42).
• Check the speaker settings (pages 101–106).
• If the digital signal format is set to PCM or DTS, set it
to Auto (page 85).
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting
the AV receiver before contacting the dealer from
whom you purchased this unit.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults,
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]
button, press the [Standby/On] button.“Clear”will
appear on the display and the AV receiver will
enter Standby mode.
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,
and be sure to select a compatible audio format.
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 97).
Power
Can’t turn on the AV receiver
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged into the wall
outlet properly.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).
Only the center speaker produces sound
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie or Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode with a mono
speaker.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to C
(page 97).
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5
seconds or more, then plug it back in again.
The AV receiver turns off as soon as it’s turned
on
• The amp protection circuit has been activated.
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources,
and leave the AV receiver with its power cord discon-
nected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power cord
and set the volume to maximum. If the AV receiver
stays on, set the volume to minimum, disconnect the
power cord, and reconnect your speakers and input
sources. If the AV receiver turns off when you set the
volume to maximum, disconnect the power cord, and
contact the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).
The surround speakers produce no sound
the surround speakers produce no sound.
• Depending on the source and the current listening
mode, not much sound may be produced by the sur-
round speakers. Try another listening mode (page 88).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).
Audio
The center speaker produces no sound
speaker produces no sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 97).
There’s no sound or it’s very quiet
selector (page 52).
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected
(page 85).
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 29).
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is
correct, and that the bare wire is in contact with the
metal part of each speaker terminal.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).
The surround back speakers produce no sound
• The surround back speakers are not used with all lis-
tening modes. Try another listening mode (page 88).
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround
back speakers with some sources.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur-
round back speakers produce no sound (page 124).
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
• Check the volume (page 62). The AV receiver is
designed for home theater enjoyment and has a wide
volume range for precise adjustment.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
The subwoofer produces no sound
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency
response changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recog-
nize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you
may hear noise.
• If the source material contains no audio in the LFE
channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the
source component is connected to an analog input.
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-
nals, sound may not be output immediately.
There’s no sound with a certain signal format
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.
Video
There’s no picture
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 29).
nected.
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
• If your TV is connected to an HDMI output, set the
HDMI Monitor setting to Main or Sub (page 48), and
select “- - -” in the “HDMI Input Setup” on page 50 to
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENTVIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MON-
ITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, set the HDMI Monitor
setting to No (page 48), and select “- - -” in the “Com-
ponent Video Input Setup” on page 51 to watch com-
posite video and S-Video sources.
Can’t get 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur-
round back speakers produce no sound (page 124).
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set
(page 111).
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has
been adjusted (pages 83 and 105), the maximum vol-
ume may be reduced.
Noise can be heard
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio
performance, so don’t use them.
• If the video source is connected to a component video
input, your TV must be connected to the COMPO-
NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1, COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI
OUT MAIN, or HDMI OUT SUB (page 30).
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT MAIN
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
• Make sure that the source is Dolby Digital (page 86).
• Check the multichannel input connections (page 34).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to
the input selector (page 53).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected
(page 85).
There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
• When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No, and the
Resolution setting is set to anything other than
Through (page 48), no video is output by the HDMI
OUT.
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not
support the current video resolution and you need to
select another resolution on your DVD player.
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.
About DTS signals
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal-
function.
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-
stream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listen-
ing mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your
player from DTS to PCM, as the AV receiver does not
switch formats immediately, you may not hear any-
thing, in which case you should stop your player for
about 3 seconds, and then resume playback.
• With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback
DTS material properly even though your player is con-
nected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is
The onscreen menus don’t appear
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
The picture is distorted
• On non-North American models, specify the TV sys-
tem used in your area in the “TV Format Setup” on
page 60.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot
be learned, especially those that contain several
instructions.
Tuner
Reception is noisy, stereo FM reception suffers
from hiss, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t
light up
• Relocate your antenna.
• Move the AV receiver away from your TV or com-
puter.
Recording
Can’t record
• Listen to the station in mono (page 63).
• When listening to anAM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is
selected.
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV
receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs
with the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).
Music Server and Internet Radio
Remote Controller
Can’t access the server or Internet radio
• Check the network connection between the AV
receiver and your router or switch.
The remote controller doesn’t work
rect polarity (page 15).
away from the AV receiver and there’s no obstruction
remote control sensor (page 15).
• Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
• Make sure the server is up and running and compatible
with the AV receiver (page 116).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
ler mode (page 16).
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control
code (page 132).
• Check the Network settings (page 122).
Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
• Make sure your server is compatible with the AV
Can’t control other components
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
ler mode (page 16).
receiver (page 116).
• If you download or copy large files on your computer,
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a
dedicated server.
• If you’ve connected an
-capable Onkyo MD
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE
IN/OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME/TV IN
jacks, for the remote controller to work properly, you
must set the Input Display to MD, CDR, or DOCK,
respectively (page 52).
• If the server is serving large music files to several net-
worked devices simultaneously, the network may
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the net-
work, upgrade your network, or use a switch instead
of a hub.
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function
to learn the commands of the other component’s
remote controller (page 135).
Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
browser
allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if
you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet
radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on
Network screen.
work as expected, and some may not work at all.
• To control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s con-
nected via
, point the remote controller at the AV
receiver. Be sure to enter the appropriate remote con-
• To control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s not
• Check the Network settings (page 122).
connected via
, or another manufacturer’s compo-
nent, point the remote controller at that component. Be
sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first
(page 132).
Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
• When learning commands, make sure that the trans-
mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at
each other.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
USB Mass Storage Device Playback
Can’t access the music files on a USB device
• Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class. However, play-
back may not be possible with some USB devices even
if they conform to the USB mass storage device class.
Others
The sound changes when I connect my head-
phones
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, or Direct, in which case it stays the same.
How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
• On the Audio Adjust menu, change the Multiplex set-
The
functions don’t work
• To use
, you must make an
connection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-
nent and AV receiver, even if they are connected digi-
tally (page 45).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the
don’t work.
functions
Components connected to the AV receiver’s AC
outlets don’t turn on or off when the AV receiver
is set to On or Standby
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable
(page 114), the AC outlets are on all the time regard-
less of whether the AV receiver is set to On or Standby,
or Ready mode in this case, so any components con-
nected to them cannot be turned on or off automati-
cally.
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal pro-
cessing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back
in again.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-
rectly.
Set the AV receiver to Standby before disconnecting
the power cord from the wall outlet.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Amplifier Section
General
Rated Output Power
Power Supply
North American:
North American:
Asian & Oceania:
Power Consumption
North American:
Asian & Oceania:
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
AC 120 V, 60Hz
AC 220-240 V, 50Hz
140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven from 20Hz to 20kHz, with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)
170 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
180 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)
9.8 A
1000 W
435 × 194 × 455 mm
17-1/8"
24.3 kg
×
7-5/8"
×
17-7/8"
Weight
Asian & Oceania:
53.6 lbs.
7 ch × 220 W at 6 ohms, 1kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
Maximum Output Power
■ Video Input
HDMI
Component
Composite
7 ch × 280 W at 6 ohms, 1kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA)
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4
IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
Dynamic Power
400 W (3Ω, Front)
300 W (4Ω, Front)
180 W (8Ω, Front)
THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion)
Damping Factor
S-Video
0.05% (1 Vrms)
60 (Front, 1kHz, 8Ω)
Input Sensitivity and
Impedance
■ Video Output
HDMI
Component
Composite
200 mV/ 47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
OUT (MAIN), OUT (SUB)
MONITOR OUT 1, MONITOR OUT 2
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
Output Level and
Impedance
Phono Overload
Frequency Response
Tone Control
200 mV/ 470 Ω (REC OUT)
70 mV (MM 1kHz, 0.5%)
5Hz–100kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)
10 dB, 20Hz (BASS)
10 dB, 20kHz (TREBLE)
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
S-Video
■ Audio Inputs
Digital Inputs
COAXIAL IN 1, IN 2, IN 3,
OPTICAL IN 1, IN 2, IN 3 (Front)
PHONO, CD, TAPE, AUX 1, GAME/TV,
CBL/SAT, VCR/DVR, DVD, MULTI CH
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,
SURR, SURR BACK), AUX 2
Signal to Noise Ratio
Speaker Impedance
Analog Inputs
4Ω–16Ω or 6Ω–16Ω
Multichannel Inputs
7.1 ch
Video Section
■ Audio Outputs
Digital Output
Analog Outputs
Input Sensitivity/Output
Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Component and S-VideoY)
0.7 Vp-p /75Ω (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)
0.28 Vp-p /75Ω (S-Video C)
OPTICAL (OUT)
TAPE, VCR/DVR, PRE OUT (FRONT,
CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR
BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Composite)
Multichannel Pre
Outputs
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
Speaker Outputs
Component Video
Frequency Response
7
1
5Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB
MAIN (FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR),
ZONE2 (L, R)
Tuner Section
Phones
PHONES
■ FM
■ Control Terminal
Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
Asian & Oceania:
MIC
Yes
87.5MHz– 107.9MHz
87.5MHz– 108.0MHz, RDS
RS232
1
Ethernet
1
■ AM
IR Input/Output
12 V Trigger Out
USB
2/1
3
1
Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
Asian & Oceania:
530kHz–1710kHz
522kHz–1611kHz
■ Digital Tuner
North American:
XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO
40
Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.
Preset Channel
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integra Division of
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
18 park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.integrahometheater.com
En
Integra Division of
ONKYO CORPORATION
Sales & Product Planning Div.: 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163
I0801-2
SN 29344544A
(C) Copyright 2008 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 3 4 4 5 4 4 A *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Ingersoll Rand Heat Pump LM2203AX User Manual
Jeep Motorized Toy Car N9356 User Manual
JVC Camcorder TK C9200E User Manual
Kambrook Clock Radio KCR90 User Manual
KEF Audio Speaker System T100SYSTEM User Manual
Kenmore Washer 1102952 User Manual
Kenmore Washer MFL67360428 User Manual
Kenwood Car Video System KDC X493 User Manual
KitchenAid Cooktop KECD805E User Manual
KitchenAid Microwave Oven KHMS105E User Manual